JP5179010B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine including at least change display means for variably displaying predetermined symbol information and profit grant state control means for controlling to a profit grant state for giving a player a profit.

Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that determines whether or not to win based on a winning at the start opening, and generates a big hit gaming state by winning as a result of the winning determination. In the big hit gaming state, a large winning opening that is normally closed is opened, and a large amount of gaming balls can be acquired in a short time by winning a gaming ball in the large winning opening. In addition, by making a probable hit even in the win, after the big hit gaming state is generated, it is controlled to a probability fluctuation state in which the probability of generating the big hit gaming state next becomes higher, and it becomes a more advantageous state for the player. It has been proposed that a display device displays an effect of being controlled in such a probability variation state using a background image or the like and notifies the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-103098 (FIG. 25)

  In such a gaming machine, since an image indicating that the state is controlled to the probability variation state is displayed on the display device, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the state is controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit gaming state. . Here, if it is determined that the game is controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit gaming state, the player can be expected to expect the big hit gaming state, but after the big hit gaming state, the player is controlled to the normal state that does not become the probability fluctuation state. When it is determined that the game is successful, the player cannot increase his expectation for the big hit gaming state. For this reason, if it is determined that the normal state is controlled after the big hit gaming state, the expectation for the big hit gaming state cannot be increased, and the interest of the game is lowered, and the game may be stopped. there were. If the number of players who stop a game for this reason increases, it may cause a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine, which may be disadvantageous to the manager of the game hall where the gaming machine is installed.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and the object of the present invention is to execute an effect that enhances the expectation regardless of the gaming state after the winning gaming state, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. It is to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

(Solution 1)
At least a variable display means for variably displaying predetermined symbol information, and a profit granting state control means for controlling to a profit granting state for granting a profit to the player, and a profit is given to the player by the profit granting state control means Based on the fact that a predetermined determination condition is established in a gaming machine that displays a predetermined display result by performing a variable display of the symbol information by the variable display means when controlling to a profit granting state. A first winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a predetermined profit to the player, and a ratio for determining that the first winning determination means gives a profit to the player after the end of the profit granting state. On the condition that it is determined to control to the high probability state by the high probability state determining means, and to determine whether to control to the high probability state Profit judging means for judging whether the profit granting state granted by the control means is the first profit granting state or the second profit granting state having a lower profit value than the first profit granting state; When the first winning determination means determines that no profit is given to the player, the second profit granting state is higher in proportion than the first winning determination means determines that the profit is given. A second winning determination means for determining whether or not to give substantially the same profit, and a high probability state after the profit granting state when the high probability state determination means determines to control to the high probability state. When it is determined not to control to the high probability state by the high probability state control means to be controlled and the high probability state determination means, or when it is determined to give a profit to the player by the second winning determination means The normal state control means for controlling the normal state different from the high probability state after the end of the profit granting state, the effect mode storage means for storing a plurality of types of effect forms, and the effect mode stored in the effect mode storage means Production mode display control means for controlling display on the fluctuation display means, and the fluctuation display means variably displays the symbol information based on the first winning judgment means and the second winning judgment means. The effect mode storage means stores a game state effect mode that suggests a game state as the plurality of types of effect modes, and the effect mode display control means has a clear high probability state among the game state effect modes. High probability state clear effect execution means for executing a high probability state clear effect by a certain high probability state effect mode, and the high probability state or the normal state among the game state effect modes A high probability state unclear demonstration execution means for executing a high-probability state unclear effect that contains the deviation or unknown representation embodiment, and the high probability state unclear effect based on the game state after the interests applied state ends the high An effect determining means for determining one of the probability state clear effects and the high probability state uncertain effect executing means in the display of fluctuation of the symbol information after the high probability state unclear effect execution means starts executing the high probability state unclear effect. It includes a determining high probability state unclear presentation end determination means for determining whether to end the state unclear effect, and determines that imparts a benefit to the player by the front Symbol first Toraku determining means, and the profit determination when it is determined that applying the first benefit applied state by means while notifying the game state of the first benefit applied state after the end of the end of the first benefit applied state, before Symbol first For winning judgment Ri determines that imparts a benefit to the player, and the when profit is determined to grant the second benefit granted state by determining means, said second benefit applied state ends up to the second benefit applied state In the variable display of the symbol information after the end of the second profit granting state without notifying the gaming state after the end, either the high probability state unclear effect or the high probability state clear effect is displayed by the effect determining means. After determining whether or not to grant the profit substantially equal to the second profit granting state by the second winning judgment means by the end of the profit granting state by the end of the profit granting state. Without changing the game state, and in the display of fluctuation of the symbol information after the end of the profit granting state, the effect determining means determines and executes the high probability state unclear effect, and the normal state When the control means is controlled to the normal state, the high probability state is such that the high probability state unclear effect is ended at a higher rate than when the high probability state control means is controlled to the high probability state. A game machine characterized in that a determination is made by an unclear effect end determination means .

  Here, “predetermined symbol information” is decorative symbols 50 a to 50 c, and “variable display means” is the liquid crystal display 50. The “profit granting state” is a big hit gaming state, a probable short hit gaming state, or a small hit gaming state, and the “profit giving state control means” is a function of the CPU 202 mounted on the main control board 201. Thus, the hit game process (step S403) is executed to control the big hit game state, the probability variation short hit game state, and the small hit game state. Further, the “specific display result” is a jackpot symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols) or a chance effect rush symbol, and the “gaming machine” is the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the “predetermined determination condition” is “whether or not a game ball has won the upper start port 68 or the lower start port 70”, and the “first winning determination means” refers to the main control board 201. This is a function of the CPU 202 to be mounted, and is a part for determining whether or not to make a big hit in the hit determination process (step S403). For example, as a method of determining whether or not to win, a random number is extracted from a random number counter that is updated (counted up) every predetermined period when a game ball is won at the start opening, and the random value and the big win It may be determined whether or not a determination value set in advance as a determination value matches, and a determination may be made as a big hit if they match. Further, the “high probability state” is a “probability variation state”, and is a state in which the probability of determining a win is increased by increasing the number of jackpot determination values. The “high probability state determination means” is a function of the CPU 202 mounted on the main control board 201. The hit determination process (step S403) is executed to obtain a probability variation determination random number and a predetermined determination value. This is a part for determining whether or not to establish a probability variation state (probability variation) based on whether or not they match. In addition, the “first profit grant state” is the “big hit game state”, and the “second profit grant state” is the “probable short win game state”, which is a big prize compared to the big hit game state. By making it difficult to win a large amount of game balls in the mouth 72, the number of game balls to be paid out decreases, and the “profit value is low”. The “profit determination means” is a function of the CPU 202 mounted on the main control board 201, and is based on whether or not the probability variation determination random number matches a predetermined determination value. This is a part for determining whether or not to win. Here, the determination as to whether or not the probability variation state by the “high probability state determination means” and the determination as to whether or not the probability change big hit or the probability change short hit by the “profit determination means” may be performed simultaneously. Good.

  The “second winning determination means” is a function of the CPU 202 mounted on the main control board 201. The hit determination process (step S403) is executed to determine a small hit determination random number and a predetermined determination value. This is a part for determining whether or not to make a small hit based on whether or not. In addition, “a higher ratio than determining that a profit is given by the first winning determination means” means that the ratio at which the small hit determination random number matches a predetermined determination value (small hit determination value) is the big hit determination random number And a predetermined determination value (big hit determination value) are higher than the rate of coincidence. In addition, “Profit substantially equal to the second profit grant state” is “Small game state” substantially equivalent to “Probability short per game state”, but “Profit equivalent to the second profit grant state” It may be. Here, when it is determined that the high probability state is not controlled by the “high probability state determination unit”, it is determined that the first profit grant state is given and the player is given a profit by the “second winning determination unit” Sometimes, a second profit grant state is given. That is, the “profit granting state control means” is “when the first winning judgment means judges that the player is to be given profit, and when the profit judging means judges that the first profit granting state is given. , While controlling to the first profit granting state, when it is determined to give the player a profit by the first winning judgment means, and when it is determined to give the second profit granting state by the profit judging means, Or, when the second winning determination means determines that a profit is to be given to the player, it is controlled to the second profit grant state. "

  The “high probability state control means” is a part that determines whether or not to win using the probability change state big hit determination table by setting a probability change flag by the CPU 202. The “normal state control means” is a function of the CPU 102 and is a part that determines that the probability variation flag is in the OFF state and selects the normal state big hit determination table in the hit determination process (step S403). is there. The “effect mode storage means” is the “display ROM 222” mounted on the display control board 220, and the “plural types of effect modes” include the normal backgrounds 51a, 51f to 51h, the special background 51b, and the normal This is a “background image (and a display mode of variable display of decorative symbols 50a to 50c corresponding to the background image)” of the chance effect background 51k and the special chance effect background 51m. The “effect mode display control means” sets a display command based on the variable display pattern command and a display command according to the background image by the integrated CPU 212 mounted on the sub-integrated board 211 and transmits the display command to the display control board 220. The display CPU 221 mounted on the display control board 220 executes display control of the liquid crystal display 50 based on process data corresponding to the display command.

The “gaming state effect mode” is an effect mode related to the game state, and includes background images and the like in addition to the decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display 50. Further, "high-probability state clear demonstration", by executing a special opportunity effect display of the effect Background 51m suggest probability change state as background image, and can be determined that the game state is the probability change state Production. Also, the term "high-probability state representation embodiment", is the effect display of special chance directing background 51m, it is a "high probability state clear demonstration execution means", a special chance directing background 51m suggesting the probability change state as the background image It is a part which performs display control of the effect display .

Also, the term "high-probability state unclear demonstration", by performing the effect display of any unknown usually chance directing background 51k of probability change state or the normal state as a background image, probability game state change state or normal This is an effect that makes it difficult to determine which of the states. Also, the term "high-probability state or any unknown production aspect of the normal state", is also in the case of any of the probability change state or normal state Ru is the effect display "normal chance directing background 51k", "high probability state the unclear demonstration execution unit "is a moiety that performs display control of the normal chance effect background 51k as background images. The “ effect determining means ” is a part for determining a background image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 50 by executing the chance effect setting process (step S717) by the integrated CPU 212 mounted on the sub-integrated board 211. . The “effect mode display control means” includes “a normal state clear effect executing means for executing a normal state clear effect by a normal state effect mode in which a normal state different from the high probability state among the game state effect modes is clear”. Is also included.
In other words, the “normal state clear effect” means that the game state is in the normal state (including the short-time state) in a period in which the above “high probability state clear effect” and “high probability state unclear effect” are not executed. It is an effect that makes it possible to determine that it is. Then, when controlling to a probable big hit game state, it is possible to determine that the game state after the probable big hit game state is a probability variation state by executing a “high probability state clear production”, while When controlling to the hit gaming state, execute either “high probability state unclear effect” or “high probability state clear effect”, and when controlling to the small hit gaming state, “high probability state unclear By executing the “effect”, it may be difficult to determine whether the game state is the probability variation state after the probability variation short hit gaming state or the normal state after the small hit gaming state.

  In this case, when it is determined that no profit is given to the player by the first winning determination means, the second profit granting state is higher in proportion than the first winning determination means determines that the profit is given. It is determined whether or not substantially the same profit is granted. Only the first winning judgment means has a low ratio of judging that the player will be profitable, and the change in the game situation may be poor and the interest of the game may be reduced, but it is higher than the first winning judgment means By executing the second winning determination means for determining that the profit is given in proportion, the change in the game situation becomes active without becoming monotonous, and the decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

Also, when it is determined that the first winning determination means grants the player a profit and the profit determining means determines that the second profit granting state is granted, or the second winning determination means determines the second profit When it is determined that a profit substantially equal to the grant state is to be granted, a high-probability state unclear effect including an unknown effect mode of either the high-probability state or the normal state is executed. In addition, when it is determined that the first winning determination means grants the player a profit and the profit determination means determines that the second profit granting state is granted, the high probability state is entered after the second profit granting state ends. On the other hand, when it is determined by the second winning determination means that the profit substantially equal to the second profit grant state is given, the normal state is controlled after the end of the second profit grant state. While the second profit granting state is frequently given by the second winning judgment means, the second profit granting state ends because there is no control to the high probability state after the second profit granting state ends. Although it is difficult to increase the expectation for the later gaming state, it is the same high as when it is determined that the first winning determination means grants the player a profit and the profit determining means determines that the second profit granting state is granted. By executing the probabilistic state unclear effect, it is not possible to determine whether the second profit granting state is based on either the first winning judgment means or the second winning judgment means. Whether it is controlled to the probability state or the normal state cannot be determined, and the expectation for the high probability state can be maintained. Therefore, the second profit determination state is frequently given by the second winning determination means, and the expectation for the high probability state can be frequently increased even in the normal state, thereby reducing the interest of the game. Can be suppressed. In addition, when it is determined that the first winning determination means grants the player a profit, and when the profit determination means determines that the second profit grant state is granted, the high probability state clear effect is executed, It is possible to recognize that the gaming state after the profit granting state that could not be determined before the end of the profit granting state is a high probability state, and information useful to the player can be obtained.

(Solution 2)
The production mode storage means, as the gaming state production mode, a high probability state recognition pattern for recognizing that it has been controlled to the high probability state, and a high probability state recognition difficulty that does not recognize whether or not it has been controlled to the high probability state The high-probability state unclear effect execution means is when the first winning determination means determines to give a profit to the player, and the profit determination means When it is determined that the second profit granting state is to be given, an effect mode based on the high probability state recognition pattern or the high probability state recognition difficult pattern in the variation display after the second profit granting state is the high probability state. While the display control is performed with an unclear effect, when the second winning determination means determines that a profit is to be given to the player, the variable display after the second profit giving state The high probability state recognition difficult representation embodiment based on the pattern, characterized in that the display control by the high probability state unclear effect SOLUTION 1 gaming machine according Te.

  Here, the “high probability state recognition pattern” is the “special chance effect background 51m based on the special chance effect execution flag at the probability variation short hit”, and the “high probability state recognition difficult pattern” is the “probability state recognition difficult pattern”. This is a normal chance effect background 51k based on the normal chance effect execution flag and the small hit normal chance effect execution flag. When the chance effect setting process (step S717) is executed by the integrated CPU 212 and the probability variation short hit flag is set, the probability variable short hit special chance effect execution flag or the probability variable short hit normal chance effect execution flag is set. On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set, the normal hit effect execution flag is set at the small hit. That is, when the display of the normal chance effect background 51k is controlled, it cannot be determined whether the flag is based on the probability variation short hit flag or the small hit flag, and whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state after the big hit gaming state. It is difficult to distinguish.

  In this case, when it is determined that the first win determination means grants a profit to the player, and when the profit determination means determines that the second profit grant state is granted, after the second profit grant state The display mode is controlled by the high probability state unclear effect while the effect mode based on the high probability state recognition pattern or the high probability state recognition difficult pattern is displayed in the variable display, and it is determined that a profit is given to the player by the second winning determination means When the second profit-giving state is finished, by controlling the display of the effect mode based on the high-probability state recognition difficulty pattern with the high-probability state-unclear effect in the variation display after the second profit-giving state, It can be noted whether the display mode is controlled based on either the high probability state recognition pattern or the high probability state recognition difficult pattern in the variable display. If the display mode is controlled based on the high-probability state recognition difficulty pattern, it cannot be determined whether the game state is the high-probability state or the normal state, but the expectation for the high-probability state is maintained. Can be made. On the other hand, when the production mode based on the high-probability state recognition pattern is controlled, it is recognized that the gaming state after the profit-giving state, which could not be determined by the end of the profit-giving state, is a high-probability state. It is possible to obtain information useful to the player.

(Solution 3)
The high-probability state unclear effect executing means determines that the first winning determination means determines to give a profit to the player, and determines that the profit determining means gives the second profit granting state. Sometimes, display control is performed with the high-probability state unclear effect in the effect display based on the high-probability state recognition difficulty pattern at a higher rate than the high-probability state recognition pattern in the variable display after the second profit granting state A gaming machine according to Solution 2, wherein:

  Here, if the probability variation short hit flag is set, the chance effect setting process (step S717) is executed by the integrated CPU 212, and the probability that the probability change short hit special chance effect execution flag is set to 1/10. Is set.

  In this case, when it is determined that the first win determination means grants a profit to the player, and when the profit determination means determines that the second profit grant state is granted, after the second profit grant state The presentation mode based on the high-probability state recognition difficult pattern by controlling the display mode based on the high-probability state recognition difficult pattern at a higher rate than the high-probability state recognition pattern in the fluctuation display of When the display control is performed, the ratio of being controlled to the high probability state is increased, and the feeling of expectation for the high probability state can be particularly increased. In addition, it is rare that the presentation mode based on the high-probability state recognition pattern is display-controlled, and when the presentation mode based on the high-probability state recognition pattern is display-controlled, a sense of superiority may be generated for the player. it can.

(Solution 4)
When the production mode display control means is controlled to the first profit granting state, the first benefit grant display control means for performing display control of the fact that it has been controlled to the first profit granting state, and the first When controlled to the second profit granting state, the high-probability state unclear effect is produced from the change display after the second profit granting state without controlling the display to the effect that the second profit granting state is controlled. The game machine according to any one of Solution 1 to Solution 3, characterized in that it includes: second profit grant display disabling control means for performing display control of the fact that the execution is started.

  Here, the “first profit giving display control means” means that the integrated CPU 212 mounted on the sub-integrated board 211 sets a jackpot start command and a jackpot end command and transmits them to the display control board 220, thereby liquid crystal. The display 50 controls the display of the effect display of the start and end of the big hit gaming state. Further, the “second profit grant display disabling means” means that a short hit start command and a short hit end command are set and transmitted to the display control board 220 by the integrated CPU 212 mounted on the sub-integrated board 211, so that the liquid crystal This is the part that controls display of the effect display (chance effect entry display 51j) of the chance effect.

  In this case, when the second profit granting state is controlled, the high probability is obtained from the change display after the second profit granting state without controlling the display of the second profit granting state. By performing display control that the execution of the state unclear effect is started, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the state is controlled to the second profit granting state. If the display control is performed to the effect that the second profit grant state is controlled, the second profit grant state gives an impression that it has been lost because the profit value is lower than the first profit grant state. This is not the case by not performing display control of the fact that the second profit grant state is controlled.

(Solution 5)
Sound output means capable of outputting sound as sound output means, and sound output control means for controlling output of the sound output form to the sound output means, wherein the sound output control means is in the second profit granting state. And a second profit granting output control means for controlling the sound output means to output that the second profit granting state is controlled when controlled. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  Here, the “sound output unit” is the upper speaker 29 and the lower speaker 14, and the “sound output control unit” is the upper CPU 29 and the lower speaker 14 driven by the integrated CPU 212 mounted on the sub-integrated board 211. The part to control. Further, the “second profit giving output control means” is a driving control of the upper speaker 29 and the lower speaker 14 based on the short hit opening / closing start command and the short hit opening / closing end command by the integrated CPU 212 mounted on the sub integrated board 211. It is a part to do. At this time, the “second profit giving output control means” performs output control to the sound output means in a sound output mode in which the sound output period is short and is difficult for the player to hear.

  In this case, for the player who is paying attention to the fluctuation display means, the sound output means is controlled to output that the second profit grant state is controlled when the second profit grant state is controlled. Can make it difficult to notice that the second profit-giving state is controlled.

(Solution 6)
When controlled to the profit granting state, a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling opening / closing of a predetermined large winning opening among the plurality of types of winning openings, and a winning of a game ball to the winning opening are detected. A winning detection means; and a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls when the winning detection of the game ball is detected by the winning detection means, wherein the payout means wins the game ball to the big winning opening Is detected, when a winning amount of game balls to the winning opening is detected, a larger amount of gaming balls are paid out, and when the large winning opening control means is controlled to the second profit granting state, 6. The gaming machine according to any one of Solution 1 to Solution 5, wherein the opening / closing control is performed in a short time and / or a smaller number of times than when the first profit grant state is controlled. .

  Here, the “predetermined big prize opening” is “the big prize opening 72 opened and closed by the condition actuating device”, and the “large prize opening opening / closing control means” is mounted on the main control board 201. It is a function of the CPU 202, and is a part that opens and closes the conditional operation device by executing a special electric accessory game process (step S18), movably controlling the solenoid 73a and controlling the opening and closing member 72a. The “winning detection means” is a portion that executes switch input processing (step S11) and detects detection signals from the start port switches 68a and 70a and the count switch 73a. The “payout means” is a portion that executes a payout operation process (step S12), instructs the payout board 205 to pay out game balls, and pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the payout device 209. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out based on the winning of the game ball at the upper start port 68 (detected by the start port switch 68a), and the game ball wins the lower start port 70. A predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are paid out based on the fact that the game balls are paid out (detected by the normal winning opening switch 76a). On the other hand, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is paid out, whereas a predetermined number (for example, 14) is based on the winning of the game ball (detected by the count switch 73a) at the big winning opening. ) Game balls are paid out. In this way, the big prize opening is opened, and the game balls are awarded to the opened big prize opening, so that it is shorter than the game balls are awarded to the upper start opening 68, the lower start opening 70, and the normal winning opening 76. A lot of game balls can be acquired in time. Further, in the big hit gaming state, for example, the condition operating device is controlled to be opened with an opening time of 30 seconds and the number of opening / closing operations is 15 times, whereas in the probability variation short hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state, the conditional operating device is opened. Control is performed for 0.3 seconds and opening and closing twice.

  In this case, when controlled to the second profit granting state, the winning opening is controlled by opening and closing the large winning slot in a shorter time and / or fewer times than when controlled to the first profit granting state. The number of winning game balls can be made different, and can be controlled to a plurality of types of profit granting states.

(Solution 7)
The variation display means starts the variation display of the symbol information, displays a first presentation period until a predetermined display mode is displayed, and displays a specific mode as the predetermined display mode, which is different from the symbol information. A second production period until a display result indicating whether or not to control to the first profit grant state is displayed through a predetermined production mode, and the predetermined production mode is the preceding stage. It is a production mode that can be developed from a process to a subsequent process, and when the determination to grant a profit to the player is made by the winning determination means than when the determination to give a profit to the player is not made It is a production mode that develops into the subsequent process at a high rate, and the production mode display control means determines that the first winning judgment means determines to give a profit to the player, and the profit judgment means By the above When it is determined that a profit granting state is to be granted, or when it is determined that a profit is to be given to the player by the second winning judgment means, the high probability state is determined based on the change display after the second benefit granting state. The gaming machine according to any one of Solution 1 to Solution 6, wherein display control for starting execution of a clear effect is controlled.

  Here, the “first effect period” refers to the left and right after the display of variation of all decorative symbols 50a to 50c is started (however, it may be slightly before and after the variation start timing of all decorative symbols 50a to 50c). This is a period until the decorative symbols 50a and 50c are stopped and displayed, and the "predetermined display mode" is a mode with decorative symbols that have not been stopped yet (the left and right decorative symbols 50a and 50c are stopped and displayed. However, the medium decorative design 50b is not stopped and displayed yet). In addition, the “specific mode” may be a “reach mode”, or when the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of left → right → middle, The mode in which the middle decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are variably displayed ”or“ the mode in which the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and the middle decorative symbol is variably displayed ”, in other words,“ a plurality of types of The decoration pattern to be stopped first among the decorative symbols is displayed in a stopped state, and the other decorative symbols are variably displayed. Embodiment ”. The “second effect period” is a period from when the reach mode is displayed until all the decorative symbols 50a to 50c are stopped and displayed. In addition, the “predetermined production mode” refers to a normal reach production, a branch production (the production mode according to the “previous stage process”), a super reach production (“back stage” Reach production such as production mode according to the process of "." These reach effects are executed in the order of normal reach effect → branch effect → super reach effect, and the variable display pattern that executes the super reach effect (and the branch effect) has a higher hit expectation than the normal reach effect. Is set to In the case of deriving the probable short hit game state or the small hit game state, the number in the variable display is used as the stop symbol (in this embodiment, the medium decorative symbol) of the decorative symbol after forming the reach aspect in the normal reach production. The chance effect entry design is stopped and displayed without stopping the design.

  In this case, when it is determined that the first profit grant state is to be granted, the ratio of the display control of the display result that is controlled to the first profit grant state in the previous process is low, but the second profit grant state is granted. Then, when it is determined, the display result of starting the execution of the high-probability state ambiguity effect in the previous process can be controlled to increase the expectation for the execution of the high-probability state ambiguity effect in the previous process. Yes, the production mode in the previous stage is not monotonous.

(Solution 8)
The effect mode display control means displays the symbol information that is not displayed in the display result as to whether or not to control to the first profit granting state as the display result of starting execution of the high probability state unclear effect. The gaming machine according to Solution 7, wherein display control is performed together with the specific mode.

  Here, the “display result of whether to control to the first profit grant state” is “a combination of the same numerical symbols” and is displayed in the display result of whether to control to the first profit grant state. “Unrecognized symbol information” is “chance effect rush symbol”, and “representation mode and chance effect rush symbol” is displayed and controlled as “display result of starting execution of high probability state unclear effect”.

  In this case, as a display result for starting execution of the high-probability state unclear effect, display control of the symbol information that is not displayed in the display result of whether or not to control to the first profit granting state together with the specific mode is performed. Because the symbol information that is not seen in the display result of whether or not to control to the first profit granting state is suddenly controlled, the player may recognize the start of execution of the high probability state unclear effect with surprise. it can.

(Solution 9)
High probability of determining whether or not to end the high-probability state ambiguity effect in the variable display of the symbol information after the high-probability state ambiguity effect execution means starts executing the high-probability state ambiguity effect State undetermined production end determination means is further provided, and the high probability state ambiguity effect end determination means is controlled by the high probability state control means when the normal state control means is in the normal state. The gaming machine according to any one of Solution 1 to Solution 8, wherein a determination is made to end the high-probability state unclear effect at a higher rate than when the control is performed.

  Here, the “high probability state unclear effect end determination means” is a function of the integrated CPU 212 mounted on the sub-integrated board 211, and the chance effect execution flag is set in step S801 of the background selection process (step S715). When it is set, this is a part for executing the chance effect end determination in step S839. In other words, it is determined whether or not to end the chance effect based on whether or not the determination value set in the chance effect end determination table matches the value of the chance effect determination random number. To end the chance effect (reset the chance effect execution flag in step S840). In the chance effect end determination table according to the normal chance effect execution flag and the special chance effect execution flag at the probability variable short hit, the probability change shortness regardless of whether the normal chance effect or the special chance effect is executed. While the ratio of ending the chance effect at the time of hit is set to 1/15, in the chance effect end determination table according to the normal chance effect execution execution flag at the time of the small hit, the ratio of ending the chance effect at the time of the small hit is It is set to 1/10.

  In this case, when controlled to the normal state by the normal state control means, a determination is made to end the high probability state unclear effect at a higher rate than when controlled to the high probability state by the high probability state control means. Thus, as the high probability state unclear effect is continuously executed for a long period of time, the expectation that the gaming state is a high probability state can be increased.

(Solution 10)
High probability state unclear effect number counting means for counting the number of execution times of the variable information display of the symbol information after the high probability state unclear effect executing means starts executing the high probability state unclear effect, and the high probability state High probability state unclear performance number determination means for determining whether or not the number of executions of the variable display of the symbol information counted by the unclear performance number counting means has reached the upper limit number corresponding to the high probability state unclear performance. The upper limit count is set to a greater number of times when controlled to the high probability state by the high probability state control means than when controlled to the normal state by the normal state control means. A gaming machine according to any one of Solution 1 to Solution 9, wherein:

  Here, the “high probability state unclear performance number counting means” is a function of the integrated CPU 212 mounted on the sub-integrated board 211 and is a chance in steps S892, S898, and S899 of the chance effect setting process (step S717). The upper limit number is set in the number counter when the effect execution flag is set, and 1 is subtracted every time a display command corresponding to the chance effect execution flag is set in step S833. The “high probability state unclear performance count determination means” is a function of the integrated CPU 212 mounted on the sub-integrated board 211, and a chance based on the chance effect execution flag in step S835 of the background selection process (step S715). This is a part for determining whether or not the effect background display is the upper limit number of times. If the upper limit number is reached, the chance effect execution flag is reset. The upper limit of the chance effect background display is different depending on each chance effect execution flag, and the normal chance effect execution flag and the special chance effect execution flag at the probability change short hit are 35 times. On the other hand, the small chance normal chance effect execution flag is set to 30 times.

  In this case, the upper limit number of times is set to a high probability state when the number of times is set higher than when controlled to the normal state by the normal state control unit when controlled to the high probability state by the high probability state control unit. The longer the unclear performance is executed, the higher the expectation that the gaming state is in a high probability state.

(Solution 11)
High probability state unclear effect number counting means for counting the number of execution times of the variable information display of the symbol information after the high probability state unclear effect executing means starts executing the high probability state unclear effect, and the high probability state High probability state unclear performance number determination means for determining whether or not the number of executions of the variable display of the symbol information counted by the unclear performance number counting means has reached the upper limit number corresponding to the high probability state unclear performance. The upper limit count is set to a greater number of times when controlled to the high probability state by the high probability state control means than when controlled to the normal state by the normal state control means. And the high probability state ambiguity effect end determination means at a higher rate than the high probability state ambiguity effect end determination means reaches the upper limit number of times according to the high probability state ambiguity effect. When it is determined to end the probability state indefinitely effect was made, the gaming machine according to the solving means 9, characterized in that ends the high-probability state unclear effect.

  Here, when the chance effect at the time of the probability variation short is executed, the end ratio by the chance effect end determination is 1/15 for each variable display, while the upper limit number of the effect display is set to 35 times, When the chance effect at the time of the small hit is executed, the end ratio by the chance effect end determination is 1/10 for each variable display, and the upper limit number of the effect display is set to 30 times. In either case, the chance that the end condition of the chance effect is satisfied by the chance effect end determination is high.

  In this case, the upper limit number of times is set to a high probability state when the number of times is set higher than when controlled to the normal state by the normal state control unit when controlled to the high probability state by the high probability state control unit. The longer the unclear performance is executed, the higher the expectation that the gaming state is in a high probability state. Also, the high-probability state ambiguity effect end determination means ends the high-probability state ambiguity effect end determination means at a higher rate than the high-probability state ambiguity effect count determination means reaches the upper limit number corresponding to the high-probability state ambiguity effect. When the determination is made, the high-probability state ambiguity effect is ended, so that the display is not controlled beyond the upper limit number of times while the end timing of the high-probability state ambiguity effect is random. Therefore, the production mode does not become monotonous, and it is possible to make the game interesting.

(Solution 12)
The gaming machine according to any one of Solution 1 to Solution 11, wherein the high-probability state unclear effect execution unit controls display of different background images as the high-probability state unclear effect.

  Here, the “background images different from each other” are “special chance effect background 51m and normal chance effect background 51k”, and backgrounds having different background colors and characters are drawn.

  In this case, as a high-probability state unclear effect, by controlling display of different background images, the gaming state after the second profit grant state that could not be determined by the end of the second profit grant state is high. It is possible to inform the player casually whether or not the probability state has been determined.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game by executing an effect that can enhance the expectation regardless of the gaming state after the winning gaming state.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the pachinko machine with the main body frame and the front frame opened.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine includes an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, a game board 4, a front frame 5, and the like. The outer frame 2 is formed in a vertically rectangular frame shape by upper, lower, left and right frame members, and has a lower plate 6 that receives the lower surface of the main body frame 3 at the lower front side of the outer frame 2. A main body frame 3 is attached to the front side of the outer frame 2 by a hinge mechanism 7 so as to be opened and closed forward. The main body frame 3 is formed by integrally molding the front frame body 8, the game board mounting frame 9, and the mechanism mounting frame 10 with a synthetic resin material. The front frame 8 formed on the front side of the main body frame 3 is formed in a rectangular frame shape having a size corresponding to the outer shape excluding the support plate 6 on the front side of the outer frame 2. In the present embodiment, the line-of-sight direction in which the front of the pachinko machine 1 is viewed is the front side (front side), and the opposite side (for example, the main body frame 3 side with respect to the front frame body 8) is the rear side (back side). And

  The main body frame 3 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin material, and a game board mounting frame 9 is formed on the front side, and a mechanism mounting frame 10 is formed on the back side. As a result, the synthetic resin main body frame 3 includes a conventional front frame (sometimes called an inner frame, a front frame, etc.) and a mechanism plate (sometimes called a back mechanism plate, a back set plate, etc.). It has a function.

  A game board 4 is attached to the game board mounting frame 9 integrally formed at the rear part of the front frame body 8 so as to be detachable and replaceable from the front. In addition, two engaging protrusions 9a are formed on the left side of the game board mounting frame 9, and two engagement recesses (not shown) are formed on the right side of the game board mounting frame 9. Has been. Further, two locking holes 4e (see FIG. 4) corresponding to the engaging protrusions 9a are formed on the left side of the board surface (front surface) of the game board 4 and the right side of the board surface of the game board 4 Two engaging hooks 4c corresponding to the engaging recesses are formed on the top and bottom. The engagement hook 4c detachably engages the game board 4 and the game board mounting frame 9 with each other.

  Further, a locking hook 9b is formed in the lower left portion of the game board 4, and an urging lock portion (not shown) corresponding to the locking hook 9b is provided in the lower left portion of the game board mounting frame 9. When the game board 4 is mounted on the game board mounting frame 9, the urging lock portion urges the locking hook 9b downward to lock it. In addition, it is possible to lock the game board 4 while applying a downward biasing force by biasing the latching hook 9b downward by the biasing lock portion. As a result, the game board 4 comes into close contact with the lower edge of the game board mounting frame 9 and is pressed and fixed downward.

  A guide rail 11 having an outer rail and an inner rail is provided on the surface of the game board 4. Further, a lower speaker 14 is attached to one side of the front lower portion of the front frame body 8 located below the game board mounting frame 9. A launch rail 15 that guides the game ball toward the launch path of the game board 4 is attached to the upper portion in the lower region of the front surface of the front frame 8 in an inclined manner. On the other hand, a lower front member 16 is attached to a lower portion in the lower area of the front surface of the front frame body 8. A lower pan 17 is provided substantially at the center of the front surface of the lower front member 16, and an operation handle 18 is provided closer to one side.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the main body frame 3 is locked to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the main body frame 3 (front frame body 8) opposite to the side on which the hinge mechanism 7 is provided. The locking device 19 having both the function to perform and the function to lock the front frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is mounted. The locking device 19 includes a plurality of upper and lower body frame locking hooks 21 that are detachably engaged with a closing tool 20 provided on the outer frame 2 to lock the main body frame 3 in a closed state, and an open side of the front frame 5. There are provided a plurality of upper and lower door locking hooks 23 that are detachably engaged with a closing tool 22 provided on the rear surface and lock the front frame 5 in a closed state.

  Thus, when the key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 24 and rotated in one direction, the engagement between the main body frame locking hook 21 and the closing tool 20 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is moved. When unlocked and the key is rotated in the opposite direction, the engagement between the door locking hook 23 and the closing tool 22 of the front frame 5 is released, and the front frame 5 is unlocked. It has become. The front end of the cylinder lock 24 is exposed to the front surface of the lower front member 16 through the front frame body 8 and the lower front member 16 so that the unlocking operation can be performed by inserting a key from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Are arranged.

  In the present embodiment, the main body frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key in the clockwise direction, and the main body frame 3 is unlocked by operating the key in the counterclockwise direction. On the other hand, the front frame 5 is unlocked. Thus, either the main body frame 3 or the front frame 5 can be unlocked only by changing the direction of the rotation operation. Further, the locking device 19 locks the main body frame 3 so that the engagement between the main body frame locking hook 21 and the closing tool 20 of the outer frame 2 is not released by an external operation other than the key when the main body frame 3 is locked in the closed state. A lock mechanism for locking the hook 21 is further provided. Thus, when the main body frame 3 is locked in the closed state, the main body frame locking hook 21 is locked by the lock mechanism. Further, a rib is formed to project from the side closer to the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 (front frame 8) than the main body frame locking hook 21 (right side in FIG. 2), and the main body frame locking hook 21 is formed by the rib. However, even if an attempt is made to directly operate the main body frame locking hook 21 by inserting a wire or the like from the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 (front frame 8), the rib contacts the rib. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an illegal act of illegally unlocking the main body frame 3 with a wire or the like from the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 (front surface frame 3).

  A front frame 5 is attached to one side of the front surface of the main body frame 3 by a hinge mechanism 25 so as to be opened and closed forward. The front frame 5 includes a door body frame 26, an upper plate 28, and operation buttons 18a (operation means). The door main body frame 26 is formed of a pressed metal frame member, and is formed to have a size that covers a portion extending from the upper end of the front frame body 8 to the upper edge of the lower front member 16. A substantially circular opening window 30 through which a game area 12 of the game board 4 described later can be seen through from the front is formed in the approximate center of the door body frame 26. Further, a window frame 31 having a rectangular frame shape larger than the opening window 30 is provided on the rear side of the door body frame 26, and a transparent plate 32 is attached to the window frame 31.

  In this embodiment, the gaming area 12 formed on the game board 4 is formed by disposing the cylinder lock 24 below the game board 4 and thinning the locking device 19 arranged on the right side of the game board 4. The area of the player can be expanded more than before, and the interest for the player's visual recognition can be enhanced. Further, by enlarging the game area 12, even if a ball guide decoration body 66, which will be described later, is arranged at the center portion of the game area 12, the game ball is placed in the variable winning device arranged below the ball guide decoration body 66. There is no impression that it is difficult to guide. In addition, the opening window 30 of the front frame 8 is enlarged in accordance with the enlargement of the game area 12, and the rigidity of the front frame 8 is reduced. However, the front frame 8 that integrally forms the upper plate 28 is used. Thus, a decrease in rigidity of the front frame 8 is suppressed.

  On the front side of the door body frame 26, around the opening window 30, an upper plate 28 is provided integrally with the front frame 8 at the lower portion, frame lamps 27 are mounted on both left and right sides, and an upper speaker 29 is mounted on the upper portion. Yes. In addition, an operation button 18 a is disposed on the left side of the upper plate 28. The frame lamp 27 is controlled to be turned on / off in accordance with the effect of the effect performed by the liquid crystal display 50 (design display means, image display means) described later, and the upper speaker 29 and the lower speaker 14 described above are controlled. The sound output control of a plurality of types of sound output modes is executed according to the effect mode of the effects executed on the liquid crystal display 50. In this way, by performing the lighting / extinguishing control of the frame lamp 27 and the sound output control of the upper speaker 29 and the lower speaker 14 in synchronization with the effect executed on the liquid crystal display 50, the effect of the effect is enhanced, and the game It is intended to improve the interest of the elderly. Further, the upper speaker 29 and the lower speaker 14 also output a warning sound for notifying that an illegal act has been executed, an information sound for notifying that an error state relating to a game has occurred, and the like.

  Next, the rear surface configuration of the main body frame 3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, a ball tank for storing game balls supplied from a ball lifting device installed on the game island is provided on the upper rear surface side of the main body frame 3. 140, a tank rail 141 that connects the ball tank 140 and the payout device 109 and allows the game balls stored in the ball tank to flow down, are arranged. The payout device 109 connected to the ball tank 140 by the tank rail 141 is formed in a unit shape, and a predetermined number of game balls are received based on a signal for accepting a game ball from the tank rail 141 and instructing the payout of the game ball. Pay out.

  A substrate protection cover 142 in which a substrate and the like are built is provided below the tank rail 141. The board protective cover 142 plays a role of preventing these boards from being damaged by a sphere dropped from the tank rail 141 and preventing illegal acts on each board. Further, the substrate protection cover 142 protrudes from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the main control substrate 201 is disposed below the substrate protection cover 142. Further, a sub-integrated board 211 (see FIG. 7) is disposed on the back side of the game board 4 of the main control board 201. Thus, the upper part of the main control board 201 and the sub integrated board 211 is covered by the board protective cover 142 projecting to the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the main control board 201 and the sub integrated board 211 are separated by the spheres dropped from the tank rail 141. Prevents damage.

  A launching device 235 is attached to the lower side of the back surface of the main body frame 3. This launching device 235 is configured by integrating a launching hammer that launches a sphere sent to the firing rail 15 and a launching motor that imparts a reciprocating rotation to the launching hammer, and is associated with the operation handle 18. ing. Further, a payout substrate 205 is provided on the right side of the launching device 235. The payout board 205 drives and controls the payout device 209 based on the receipt of a payout command instructing payout of game balls from the main control board 201.

  FIG. 4 shows the game board 4 alone. The game board 4 forms a game area 12 on the front surface (board face), and plays a role of advancing the game while flowing a game ball in the game area 12. Normally, a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed while an internal determination (a big hit determination) is performed based on the winning of game balls in various winning openings in the game area 12, or a prize ball is paid out. proceed.

  The game board 4 has a game board 4a molded in a rectangular shape, and a circular game area 12 is formed on the surface of the game board 4a. The game board 4a is decorated by attaching a cell board (not shown) on the front surface, and the upper, lower, left, and right sides and the four corners surrounding the game area 12 are decorated by a panel decoration body 4d. The panel decorative body 4d has a function of supporting the guide rail 11, the engagement hook 4c, and the like in addition to the function as a decoration. Further, two upper and lower locking holes 4e are formed on the left edge of the panel decoration body 4d to lock the engagement protrusion 9a of the game board mounting frame 9.

  In the game area 12, in addition to various components necessary for the progress of the game, various components for performance are arranged. That is, a large number of injury nails and windmills (not shown) are installed in the game area 12 in an appropriate arrangement, and the launched game balls flow down in the game area 12 while being guided by the injury nails and windmills. In addition, in the upper half from the central portion of the game area 12, a ball guide decoration body 66 that is extremely eye-catching is arranged. The ball guiding decorative body 66 is disposed so as to protrude from the surface (board surface) of the game board 4a to the front surface side, and guides the game ball along the upper edge portion and the left and right edge portions thereof, thereby allowing the game ball to flow downward. Can be changed. Note that the sphere guiding decorative body 66 will be described later.

  In the lower half of the game area 12, an upper start port 68 and a lower start port 70 are arranged vertically in the center. In the present embodiment, an electric tulip type variable winning device is applied to the lower start opening 70, and two movable pieces 70a are opened to the left and right as shown by solid lines in the drawing. Game balls can be won only when

  In the lower part of the game area 12, a big prize opening 72 is provided below the lower start opening 70. In the present embodiment, a front / rear open / close condition operating device is applied to the special winning opening 72, and the special winning opening 72 has a game ball only when the opening / closing member 72a is open to the front side as shown in the figure. Can win.

  In addition, two passing gates 74 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 12 so as to form a pair on the left and right. In the lower part of the gaming area 12, two normal winning openings 76 are provided on both sides of the big winning opening 72, and these four normal winning openings 76 extend along the lower edge of the gaming area 12. Arranged to draw an arc.

  The ball guiding decorative body 66 is molded in a horizontally long frame shape as a whole, and its inner part is hollow. When viewed from the front side, the inner part of the ball guiding decorative body 66 is configured as an effect area (area where effects such as image display and movement of the movable body are performed), and the ball guiding decorative object 66 surrounds the effect area. Arranged to decorate. The production area, the display device (liquid crystal display unit), the movable body, and the like will be described later.

  The ball guiding ornament 66 is designed based on the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or its game concept as a whole. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a game concept using a famous female singer as an image character is adopted, and the modeling applied to the ball guiding ornament 66 has a flowing and luxurious style that the female singer has. Design concept that expresses a delicate image and the delicate image of its possession (various song hit songs, love songs).

  Specifically, when an eye is first placed on the upper edge portion of the ball guiding decorative body 66, a jewel-like top decorative body 66a is disposed at the center position. The top decorative body 66a is shaped like a purple crystal (amethyst) that has been cut into polyhedrons, and an upper decorative body 66b shaped like a metal base that supports jewelry is arranged around the top decorative body 66a. A fine three-dimensional pattern is formed on the upper decorative body 66b, and the surface thereof is subjected to glossy chrome plating. For this reason, the upper decorative body 66b visually enhances the top decorative body 66a as a gemstone by its fine modeling and metallic luster.

  In addition, side decorative bodies 66c are arranged on the left and right side edges of the ball guiding decorative body 66 so as to form a pair on the left and right. These side decorations 66c are modeled after "flies", which are fictitious animals (Chinese ancient ruins of birds). It is a dynamic expression of what to do. Gold plating is applied to the surfaces of the left and right side decorative bodies 66c, and the golden luster creates a visually luxurious and mysterious atmosphere.

  An inner edge decoration body 66d extending from the upper edge portion to the left and right inner edge portions and the lower edge portion is disposed on the inner edge (inner peripheral portion) of the ball guide decoration body 66. These inner edge decorations 66d are formed so as to extend diagonally downward on the left and right from both sides of the upper decoration body 66b at the central position, and then bend to the back, and from the upper end position to the lower end position of the left and right inner edge parts. And further extends to the lower edge. Although hidden behind the side decorative body 66c in FIG. 4, the inner edge decorative body 66d extends downward at a position close to the front surface of the protective plate 120 at the left and right inner edge portions, and as it goes downward, the side decorative body 66c. It curves so that it protrudes from the back to the front. Furthermore, the left and right inner edge decorative bodies 66d are exposed from the vicinity of the lower end of the side decorative body 66c (the portion corresponding to the tip of the tail of the “鳳凰”) to the front side of the lower edge portion, and the front surface of the lower edge portion is left in the vicinity of the center. It extends to. The left and right inner edge decorative bodies 66d are also chrome-plated in the same manner as the upper decorative body 66b. Therefore, the left and right inner edge decorative bodies 66d have a visual sense of unity with the upper decorative body 66b. It is visually recognized by the player as if the upper decorative body 66b and the left and right inner edge decorative bodies 66d are formed in a continuous manner.

  A lower decorative body 67 is installed along the inner edge of the lower edge portion of the ball guiding decorative body 66. The lower decorative body 67 is disposed so as to close the space between the lower edge of the ball guiding decorative body 66 and the protective plate 120. The lower decorative body 67 is shaped with the peripheral decorative member 122 (see FIG. 5) as a whole and has a unified design, and in the vicinity of the center there is a pair of feathered decorative parts on the left and right. Is formed. The surface of the lower decorative body 67 is also chrome plated.

  On the other hand, an upper edge decorative body 66e that extends from the upper decorative body 66b to the left and right is disposed at the upper edge of the ball guiding decorative body 66. The upper edge decoration body 66e has two mountain shapes arranged side by side when viewed from the front, and has a certain depth (thickness) as a whole. The front surface of the upper edge decoration body 66e is subjected to fine three-dimensional modeling such as jewels arranged, and the entire surface is gold-plated. For this reason, the metallic luster of the upper decorative body 66b and the inner edge decorative body 66d and the golden luster of the adjacent upper edge decorative body 66e have a glittering contrast, and there is a visual luxury and a gorgeous atmosphere. Is born.

  The light emitting areas 64a and 64b are arranged at symmetrical positions around the central upper decorative body 66b. Among these, the four light emitting areas 64 a arranged in the upper rank function as displaying special symbols in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The special symbol is information (determination information) that indicates to the outside that a special symbol determination (big hit determination) is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and that the winning result has come out. That is, if there is a prize for the upper start opening 68 or the lower start opening 70 in the normal gaming state (non-hit game) in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the four light emitting areas 67a are triggered by various patterns and light emitting colors. The blinking operation is started, and the variation state of the special symbol is thereby displayed. With such a special symbol variation start (so-called “start”), the player can recognize that the jackpot determination has been performed (or that the determination result will be output from now on). Thereafter, when a certain amount of time has elapsed, the blinking operation of the light emitting area 64a is stopped, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the determination result (winning result) at that time is displayed. With regard to the special symbol stop display mode, in a simple example, if all the four light emitting areas 64a are lit in the same color, it represents a win (big hit), and any one of the four light emitting areas 64a has a different lighting color. Or if it is turned off, it may indicate a loss (however, there are other modes as well). Thereby, the player can visually recognize whether or not the jackpot determination is won.

  On the other hand, the four light emitting areas 64b arranged in the lower layer function as a holding (starting memory) lamp in the pachinko gaming machine 1. These four light emitting areas 64b can represent the number of stored special symbols (the number of reserved balls of 1 to 4) by the number of lights (lighted) at that time. Specifically, if there is a winning at the upper start opening 68 or the lower start opening 70 during the game, the start condition of the special symbol is stored as an opportunity, and if the special symbol is in a variable display in this state, The leftmost light emitting area 64b emits light (lights up), and it is displayed that the starting memory number (the number of reserved balls) is one. On the other hand, if the special condition does not fluctuate in the state where the start condition is stored (including the case where the stop state is changed from the fluctuating state), the special symbol fluctuating display starts based on the stored start condition. Is done. In this case, the storage of the start condition is erased, and the light emission of the light emitting area 64b corresponding to the start storage number “1” is stopped (turned off). In the present embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of start memories (the number of held balls) is 4, when the upper limit is reached, no further start conditions are stored. The special symbol and the start memory number are displayed by the special symbol display LED 144a and the special symbol start memory LED 144b mounted on the special symbol / holding display LED substrate 144, respectively. The special symbol display LED 144a and the special symbol start memory LED 144b will be described later.

  On the other hand, left and right upper corner decorative bodies 66f are arranged on the upper edge of the ball guiding decorative body 66 so as to connect the upper decorative body 66b and the left and right side decorative bodies 66c. In addition, left and right lower corner decoration bodies 66g are disposed below the left and right side decoration bodies 66c at the lower edge of the ball guide decoration body 66, respectively. The upper corner decorative body 66f and the lower corner decorative body 66g have a three-dimensional shape that reminds of a “hagoromo” named after “acupuncture”, and its wavy shape is a side decorative body as “acupuncture” 66c visually emphasizes that he is about to fly. Each of the upper corner decoration body 66f and the lower corner decoration body 66g is formed from a light-transmitting translucent material. Of these, the left and right upper corner decoration bodies 66f are the center left upper LED substrate 104 or the center described later. A decorative light emitting operation by the upper right LED board 106 is performed. In the lower left and right corner decoration bodies 66g, a decorative light emission operation is performed by the center left lower LED board 112 or the center right lower LED board 114 described later.

  As described above, the sphere guide decorative body 66 has a function of exhibiting visual interest by its decorative modeling and plating, and performing various light emitting operations using the built-in LED as a light source. In addition, the ball guiding ornament 66 has a function of adding interest to the game by guiding the flow of the game ball within the game area 12 and changing the movement of the game ball. Specifically, warp passages 66h are formed on both side edges of the ball guide decoration body 66, and a stage portion 66i is formed on the upper surface of the lower edge part of the ball guide decoration body 66. Has been. The warp passage 66h starts from the left and right sides of the ball guiding decorative body 66, descends from both side edges, and communicates with the stage portion 66i. Further, a ball discharge port 66j is formed at the center position of the lower edge portion of the ball guide decorative body 66.

  The warp passage 66h is opened on both side surfaces of the ball guiding decorative body 66, and the game ball can be received inside through the opening. The left and right warp passages 66h are bent toward the back side (rear) from the inside of the side decoration body 66c while descending slightly in the central direction, and gather in the central direction at a position slightly below in the downward direction. And curved. The lower ends of the left and right warp passages 66h are opened as warp outlets, and the ends from the openings are directly connected to the stage portion 66i. Further, in each warp passage 66h, two protrusions (not shown) are formed in the middle of the warp passage 66h, and a game ball flowing down in each warp passage 66h has a flow-down speed while colliding with these protrusions. Alleviated. Then, when the game ball is released from the exit of the warp passage 66h, it rolls on the stage portion 66i beyond that.

  The stage portion 66i extends long in the left-right direction between the left and right warp passages 66h, and is curved so that the central portion is slightly raised. A center recess (not shown) is formed at the center of the stage portion 66i, and the center recess has a downward slope toward the rear. A ball drop hole 67d is formed at the center of the lower decorative body 67 at the bottom of the center recess, and a ball discharge passage (shown in the figure) extends downward from the ball drop hole 67d at the lower edge of the ball guide decorative body 66. Not) is formed. The ball discharge passage is bent forward after descending downward from the ball drop hole 67d, and communicates with the ball discharge port 66j on the front surface side while having a downward slope.

  The game ball released to the stage portion 66i from the left and right warp passages 66h rolls while swinging in the left-right direction on the upper surface. Among these, the game ball fitted in the central center depression is discharged downward from the ball discharge port 66j through the ball discharge passage. The game ball released from the ball discharge port 66j falls toward the upper start port 68 located immediately below the ball, and can win the upper start port 68 with a high probability.

  On the other hand, on the upper surface of the stage portion 66i, the game ball fitted into the left or right hollow portion 67b flows down from there to the ball discharge portion 67f, and passes through the discharge hollow portion 67c from the ball guiding decorative body 66. It falls to the lower game area 12. Since the discharge depression 67c has a certain width (the width that allows the game ball to roll to the left and right), the direction of the drop is not constant, and some may win the upper start opening 68 Things deviate from the upper start port 68 to the left and right and do not win.

  In the present embodiment, the stage portion 66i and the discharge portion 67f are both located on the heel from the front surface of the game board 4a, that is, inside the opening 4f. For this reason, the game area 12 where the game ball flows down extends from the surface of the game board 4a to the inside of the opening 4f, and the range in which the game ball can flow down is expanded in the front-rear direction, and is three-dimensional and diverse. The flow-down mode of the game ball is realized. In addition, even if the range of the game area 12 is expanded to the inside of the opening 4f as described above, in this embodiment, the protection plate 120 can reliably prevent the game ball from falling or jumping inward from the game plate 4a. ing.

  The movable body 124 is divided into four groups on the left and right when not operating, and is hidden behind a position that is not visible to the player (a position behind the game board 4a and below the opening 4f). In operation, the individual movable bodies 124 are displaced to the operating positions at different angles, and are arranged so as to form a fan as a whole. The surface of each movable body 124 is densely modeled in the shape of a “wing of a spider”, thereby unifying the design of the ball guiding ornament 66.

  Looking at this state from the viewpoint of the player, the decoration surface (front surface) of the ball guiding decoration body 66 is first located on the most front side, and the stage portion 66i and the inner edge where the game ball swings in the left-right direction at a slightly lower position than this. The decorative surface of the liquid crystal display unit 150 is positioned next to the movable body 124 in the space portion of the bag with the protective plate 120 interposed therebetween. . Therefore, when the player sends his gaze to the most display screen, the space, the movable body 124, the protection plate 120, the decoration surface of the ball guiding ornament 66, the stage portion 66i, etc. are recognized in the field of view. As a result, the visual depth and stereoscopic effect are enhanced by the overlap in the front-rear direction.

  In addition to the ball guiding ornament 66, a side decoration member 82 that is paired on the left and right is installed on the lower edge of the game area 12. Of the four normal winning holes 76, the normal winning holes 76 positioned at the upper right and the upper left are formed integrally with the side decoration member 82. The side decorative member 82 has a design that is consistent with the design concept of the ball guiding decorative body 66. In the present embodiment, the variable winning device constituting the lower start opening 70 and the normal winning opening 76 located at the lower right and the lower left are also decoratively shaped, and the design thereof includes a ball guide decorative body 66. And the design of the side decoration member 82 are unified.

  Two light emitting regions 82a and four light emitting regions 82b are arranged in the left-right direction on the upper part of the left side decorative body 82. Among these, the two light emitting areas 82a arranged on the right side function as displaying normal symbols in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The normal symbol is information (determination information) for displaying the fact that the normal symbol determination is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the result of the winning is given to the outside. Further, the four light emitting areas 82b arranged on the left side function as a normal symbol holding (starting memory) lamp in the pachinko gaming machine 1. These four light-emitting areas 82b can represent the number of stored normal symbols (the number of reserved balls of 1 to 4) by the number of lights (lighted) at that time. The normal symbol and the start memory number are displayed by the normal symbol display LED 146a and the normal symbol start memory LED 146b mounted on the normal symbol / holding display LED substrate 146, respectively. The normal symbol display LED 146a and the universal symbol start memory LED 146b will be described later.

  In addition, two light emitting regions 82c and four light emitting regions 82d are arranged in the left-right direction above the right side decorative body 82. Of these, the two light emitting areas 82c arranged on the left side can represent information related to the type of the big hit gaming state depending on which light emitting area 82c emits light (lights up) at that time. Further, the four light emitting areas 82d arranged on the right side can represent information on the gaming state such as in the probability variation state depending on which combination of the light emitting areas 82d emits light (lights up). The display of these game states is performed by the round display LED 148a and the state display LED 148b mounted on the state display LED substrate 148. These round display LEDs 148a and status display LEDs 148b will also be described later.

  FIG. 5 shows the game board 4 divided into components. As described above, decorative parts such as the ball guiding decorative body 66 and the side decorative member 82 are attached to the front surface of the game board 4a in addition to various winning holes and the like. Openings 4f and 4g are formed at the mounting positions, respectively. The openings 4f and 4g are formed so as to penetrate the game board 4a in the front-rear direction (thickness direction), and the opening edge shape of the opening 4f formed large in the center corresponds to the outer shape of the ball guide decoration body 66. In addition, the opening edge shape of the opening 4g formed in a pair on the left and right corresponds to the outer shape of the left and right side decoration members 82. The ball guiding decorative body 66 and the left and right side decorative members 82 are both attached to the game board 4a in a state of being fitted into the openings 4f and 4g from the front side.

  On the other hand, a large back mounting unit 100 is attached to the back of the game board 4a. The back mounting unit 100 is configured as a unit in which all electrical components related to the rendering operation in the game area 12 are gathered together. The effect operation here includes, for example, image display, various light emission operations, operation of a movable body, and the like. In the present embodiment, the back mounting unit 100 is a component that performs the rendering operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 together with the above-described ball guiding ornament 66. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, the ball guidance decorative body 66 and the back surface mounting unit 100 will be collectively referred to as an effect device (reference numeral 400 in the figure).

  The ball guiding decorative body 66 constituting the effect device 400 is attached so as to be fitted into the opening 4f from the front side of the game board 4a. On the other hand, the rear mounting unit 100, which is another component of the effect device 400, is large enough to cover the three openings 4f and 4g from the rear side while being attached to the rear side of the game board 4a. Have. That is, the back mounting unit 100 has not only electrical components necessary for performing the rendering operation on the ball guiding decorative body 66 but also electrical components necessary for performing the rendering operation (light emission) on the left and right side decoration members 82. Equipped.

  The rear mounting unit 100 is roughly divided into two parts, and specifically includes an upper part 100a on the upper side and a lower part 100b on the lower side. Of these, the upper part 100a is a part in which electric parts corresponding to the ball guiding ornament 66 are incorporated, and the lower part 100b is a part in which electric parts corresponding to the left and right side decoration members 82 are incorporated. .

  The upper part 100a is formed in a horizontally long rectangle in accordance with the outer shape of the ball guide decoration body 66. The upper LED board 102 is installed on the upper edge of the upper part 100a. The upper LED board 104 and the center right upper LED board 106 are installed. Further, the center left middle LED board 108 and the center right middle LED board 110 are respectively installed on the left and right side edges of the upper part 100a. Furthermore, a center left lower LED board 112 and a center right lower LED board 114 are installed at the left and right lower corners of the upper part 100a, respectively. A center lower LED substrate 116 is installed at the center position of the lower edge of the upper part 100a. These LED substrates emit light from the back of the spherical guiding ornament 66 toward the front or the side, so that the light emitting area of the spherical guiding ornament 66 can be decoratively emitted. The center lower LED substrate 116 is mounted with LEDs that emit light upward behind the protective plate 120, and the light emitted from these upward LEDs irradiates the movable body 124 on the front side of the display screen. To do.

  A transparent protective plate 120 is installed at the center position of the upper part 100a. The protection plate 120 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and is attached to the upper part 100a so as to be fitted from the front side. The center left lower LED board 112, the center right lower LED board 114, and the center lower LED board 116 are installed on the back side of the protective plate 120 in the upper part 100a. Further, the center left upper LED substrate 104 and the center right upper LED substrate 106 are partially located on the back side of the protective plate 120.

  Note that the center left middle LED board 108 and the center right middle LED board 110 located at the left and right edge portions are on both outer sides of the protection plate 120, and the mounting surfaces thereof are perpendicular to the protection plate 120. It is attached to the upper part 100a. In this state, the LEDs mounted on the center left middle LED board 108 and the center right middle LED board 110 are positioned so that the centers face each other. A part of the light emitted from these LEDs is introduced into the transparent material of the protective plate 120 from both end faces of the protective plate 120 as an edge light, and is guided while being totally reflected inside. For this reason, in this embodiment, the transparent protective plate 120 also has a function as a light guide plate.

  On the inner side of the upper part 100a, a rectangular frame-shaped peripheral decorative member 122 is installed at a position behind the protective plate 120. The peripheral decorative member 122 is disposed along the upper, lower, left and right peripheral portions of the protective plate 120 and is visible through the transparent protective plate 120 from the front side.

  In addition, left and right movable bodies 124 are installed at positions behind the protective plate 120 at the lower edge of the upper part 100a. The left and right movable bodies 124 are molded from elongated plate-like members, and are housed inside the upper part 100a in a state where four such plate-like movable bodies 124 are stacked in the front-rear direction on the left and right. Has been. The left and right movable bodies 124 maintain a posture that hangs obliquely downward from the center position in a symmetrical manner.

  In addition, a movable body drive unit motor 126 including a gear box is installed at a lower edge portion of the upper part 100a in addition to a movable body drive unit motor 126 at a position below the protective plate 120. The movable body drive unit motor 126 serves as a drive source for operating the movable body 124, and the movable body drive unit 128 transmits the driving force of the movable body drive unit motor 126 to each movable body 124, and actually moves the movable body 124. It has the function of operating in a predetermined manner.

  The movable body drive unit 128 incorporates a movable body motor sensor 234 (only the reference numeral is shown in FIG. 9). The movable body motor sensor 234 includes a transmissive photo switch, and the movable body motor sensor 234 can detect the position of the movable body 124 when the movable body driving unit motor 126 is operated.

  The other lower part 100b is connected so as to hang just below the upper part 100a, and the overall outer shape thereof is an alphabetic W-shape. That is, the left and right side portions of the lower part 100b extend so as to expand upward, while the connecting portion that connects between the left and right side portions has a central position slightly raised upward. Thereby, when the lower part 100b is seen as a whole, it turns out that it has comprised W shape.

  Side LED boards 130 are respectively installed on the left and right sides of the lower part 100b. These side LED boards 130 emit light from behind the left and right side decoration members 82 toward the front, so that the light emitting areas of the side decoration members 82 can be lit in a decorative manner.

  In the present embodiment, information related to internal determination (special symbol determination, normal symbol determination, etc.) performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed using multicolor or single color LEDs. Various LED boards are installed in the back mounting unit 100.

  First, on the upper edge of the upper part 100a, a special symbol / holding display LED substrate 144 (only reference numerals are shown in FIG. 9) is installed behind the center LED substrate 102. On the special symbol / holding display LED substrate 144, four special figure display LEDs 144a and four special figure start storage LEDs 144b are mounted. For example, when an internal determination (determination to determine a big hit) is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special symbol display LED 144a and the special diagram start memory LED 144b are turned on or blinking (or turned off) in a predetermined pattern, and information on the determination Is displayed.

  Next, a normal symbol / holding display LED board 146 is installed at the upper position of the left part of the lower part 100b. On the normal symbol / holding display LED substrate 146, two general symbol display LEDs 146a and four universal symbol start memory LEDs 146b are mounted. When the normal symbol determination is performed in addition to the above jackpot determination, the general diagram display LED 146a and the general diagram start memory LED 146b are turned on or blinking (or turned off) in a predetermined pattern, and information regarding the determination is displayed. Yes.

  Further, a status display LED substrate 148 is installed at the upper position of the right part of the lower part 100b. On this status display LED substrate 148, two round display LEDs 148a and four status display LEDs 148b are mounted. If the winning is determined by the jackpot determination, the round display LED 148a and the status display LED 148b are turned on or blinking (or turned off) in a predetermined pattern, and information on the gaming state such as the jackpot or the probability change is displayed. Yes.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, various effects of light emission (including display of determination information related to the player's interests in addition to decorative light emission) are performed in the rendering device 400 to enhance the player's interest, In particular, in the present embodiment, although the ball guide decorative body 66 attached to the front side of the game board 4a is provided with a large number of light emitting areas, All of the LED boards that serve as the light emission sources are provided on the back side (back mounting unit 100) of the game board 4a. For this reason, all the LED boards and electric wiring required for operation | movement of the production | presentation apparatus 400 can be accommodated in the back surface mounting unit 100, and it is not necessary to provide an LED board and electric wiring separately in the ball | bowl induction decoration body 66. FIG.

  FIG. 6 shows the rear mounting unit 100 in a state where it is divided into components. In the back mounting unit 100, a liquid crystal display unit 150 is assembled on the back side of the upper part 100a. The liquid crystal display unit 150 is configured by integrating a display control board 220 and a liquid crystal display (LCD module) 50, and the display control board 220 is accommodated in the board box 150a in the state of the liquid crystal display 50. Installed on the back. In the present embodiment, a fan 150b for heat dissipation or cooling is installed on the back surface of the substrate box 150a.

  A panel relay terminal plate 151 is installed on the back side of the lower part 100b (connection portion). The panel relay terminal board 151 is connected with harnesses corresponding to the special symbol / holding display LED substrate 144, the normal symbol / holding display LED substrate 146, and the status display LED substrate 148 in one place. Each LED board is connected to the main control board 201 via the panel relay terminal board 151.

  In order to support the liquid crystal display unit 150, on the back side of the upper part 100a, a receiving portion 100c is formed on the lower edge portion thereof, and two locking portions 100d are formed on the left side edge portion when viewed from the back side. Further, an up-and-down slide type lock member 100e is installed on the right edge. Further, the back surface of the upper part 100a is formed as a flat receiving surface. When the liquid crystal display unit 150 is assembled to the upper part 100a from the back side, the display screen of the liquid crystal display unit 150 is closely attached to the receiving surface. Have a relationship. In addition, the rear end of the peripheral decorative member 122 contacts the front surface of the liquid crystal display unit 150 and functions as a receiving member that receives the liquid crystal display unit 150.

  Although not shown in FIG. 6, a protrusion is formed on the left edge of the substrate box 150a corresponding to the two locking portions 100d, and when the liquid crystal display unit 150 is assembled to the upper part 100a, The liquid crystal display unit 150 is locked to the upper part 100a in a state where the protrusions enter the two locking portions 100d. Further, regarding the vertical direction, the lower surface of the liquid crystal display unit 150 is supported by the receiving portion 100c of the upper part 100a, and its fall is prevented. A lock claw 150c is formed on the right edge of the substrate box 150a. When the liquid crystal display unit 150 is brought into close contact with the receiving surface of the upper part 100a, the lock member 100e is slid upward to lock. The liquid crystal display unit 150 is locked via the claw 150c, thereby reliably preventing the liquid crystal display unit 150 from falling backward. In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display unit 150 can be easily attached to the rear surface mounting unit 100 by locking the liquid crystal display unit 150 using the lock claw 150c and the lock member 100e. On the other hand, when removing the liquid crystal display unit 150, the liquid crystal display unit 150 can be easily removed simply by releasing the locking of the lock member 100e. Accordingly, the liquid crystal display unit 150 can be easily attached and detached, and in particular, the liquid crystal display unit 150 which is an expensive electrical component in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily recycled and reused.

  As described above, the rear mounting unit 100 is equipped with all the electrical components necessary for rendering operations such as various LED boards, the movable body drive unit motor 126, the liquid crystal display unit 150, and the like. All the connected electrical wirings (harnesses) are relayed to the sub-integrated board 201 in a state where the electrical wirings (harnesses) are gathered in one place in the rear mounting unit 100. In other words, the rear mounting unit 100 is equipped with a lamp driving board 156, and all the electrical wiring connected to all the electrical components for the purpose of production operation is collected on the lamp driving board 156 and connected to a relay circuit on the board. The A connector for connecting to the sub-integrated board 211 is mounted on the lamp driving board 156.

  The lamp driving substrate 156 is attached to the rear surface mounting unit 100 while being accommodated in an openable / closable substrate case 158. The substrate case 158 is provided with an openable / closable substrate case 158 via a hinge 158a on the back side of the upper part 100a. For this reason, the substrate case 158 can be opened and closed on the back side of the back mounting unit 100. . A locking portion 158b is formed on the upper edge portion of the substrate case 158, and a receiving portion 100f is formed on the upper edge portion of the upper part 100a correspondingly. When the substrate case 158 is closed from the position shown in FIG. 6 along the back surface of the upper part 100a, the locking portion 158b is inserted into the receiving portion 100f and locked. As a result, the substrate case 158 is locked in the closed position.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the liquid crystal display unit 150 can be attached to and detached from the rear surface mounting unit 100 with the substrate case 158 of the lamp driving substrate 156 opened to the rear surface side. Further, when the substrate case 158 is moved to the closed position in a state where the liquid crystal display unit 150 is assembled, the lamp driving substrate 156 is positioned along the back surface of the liquid crystal display unit 150. Note that “opening / closing”, “opening”, “closed position”, and the like here are all expressed in the present embodiment as if the movement of the substrate case 156 in the front-rear direction is regarded as a door. Strictly speaking, the substrate case 156 itself does not open or close any opening or entrance / exit, but here it is expressed as “opening / closing” or the like for convenience in order to facilitate intuitive understanding. Also in the following description, expressions likened to doors are used as appropriate for the movement of the substrate case 156, the control substrate box, and the like.

  FIG. 7 shows the attachment / detachment of the back mounting unit 100 on the back side of the game board 4. As shown in the figure, in a state where the sub-integrated board box 211a is rotated to the rear of the game board 4a together with the main control board box 201a, the center portion of the lower back guiding member 160 described later is largely opened rearward. Therefore, in this state, the back mounting unit 100 can be easily attached to and detached from the game board 4a alone.

  Separately from the back mounting unit 100, a lower back guiding member 160 is installed on the back surface of the game board 4a at the position of the lower edge thereof. The lower back guide member 160 has a lateral width slightly shorter than the width dimension of the game board 4a, and the four insertion parts 160c formed on both side ends thereof are inserted into the game board 4a from the back side. It is fixed by screwing. The lower back guiding member 160 is formed with an all winning ball guiding passage 160a for guiding the game balls won in all winning ports. The all starting ball guiding passage 160a has the upper start opening 68 described above. The game balls won in the lower start opening 70, the big winning opening 72, and the normal winning opening 76 are dropped and collected. Although not shown in detail in FIG. 7, the all winning ball guiding passage 160a extends in the width direction along the back surface of the game board 4a, and is opened downward at the lower end position of the lower back guiding member 160. . Note that the game balls released downward from all the winning ball guide passages 160a pass through the winning ball collection path formed in the main body frame 3, and then, the ball discharge portion (positioned immediately below the payout board 205 in FIG. 3). To the collection route of island facilities.

  As described above, the sub-integrated board 211 is installed together with the main control board 201 on the back side of the game board 4, and both the main control board 201 and the sub-integrated board 211 correspond to the main control board box 201a. Alternatively, it is accommodated in the sub-integrated substrate box 211a. Of these, the main control board box 201a is located on the back side of the sub-integrated board box 211a via hinges 80c (only one upper part is shown in FIG. 7) having two left and right edges when viewed from the back side. It is supported rotatably.

  One sub-integrated board box 211a is supported by the lower back guide member 160 via two hinge portions 162b on the left side when viewed from the back side. Therefore, when the sub-integrated board box 211a is opened rearward, the main control board box 201a is opened together with this. In the present embodiment, a locking portion 162c is formed on the right edge of the sub-integrated board box 211a, while a receiving portion 160b corresponding to the locking portion 162c is formed on the lower back guide member 160. Therefore, when the sub integrated board box 211a is pushed toward the back of the game board 4a, the locking part 162c is locked to the receiving part 160b, and the sub integrated board box 211a is fixed at the mounting position. Also, a locking portion 80d is formed at the right edge of the main control board box 201a, and the locking portion 80d is locked to the locking portion 162c of the sub-integrated board box 211a. Therefore, by releasing the locking of the locking portion 80d, the main control board box 201a can be opened and closed independently with respect to the sub integrated board box 211a.

  At the lower part of the lower back guide member 160, protrusions 160d and 160e are formed at two places on the left and right. These projecting portions 160d and 160e project toward the rear of the game board 4a, and one of these projecting portions 160d (left side in FIG. 7) is used as a member for receiving the hinge portion 162b of the sub-integrated board box 211a. ing. In the present embodiment, when the game board 4 is placed alone on a table or on the floor, the two projecting portions 160d and 160e support the back of the game board 4 and can prevent the rearward fall. Thereby, the stability at the time of temporarily placing the game board 4 on the table or the floor during the board change work in the hall is increased, and the workability can be improved. At this time, the sub-integrated board box 212a and the main control board box 201a may be used as a support together with the protrusions 160d and 160e.

  FIG. 8 shows an arrangement relationship of various components attached to the game board 4a. The ball guiding ornament 66 protrudes from the front side of the game board 4a to the back side of the game board 4a in a state of being fitted into the opening 4f. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the three-dimensional decorative shape of the ball guiding decorative body 66 from the front surface of the game board 4a to the position where only the depth D enters, so that the player can feel the visual depth there.

  On the other hand, the back mounting unit 100 is attached to the back surface of the game board 4a. However, the protection plate 120 is more than the back surface of the game board 4a because the ball guiding decorative body 66 projects to the back side of the game board 4a. Located behind. In the present embodiment, the front surface of the protection plate 120 is in contact with or very close to the rear end surface of the ball guiding ornament 66 with the back surface mounting unit 100 mounted, and at this position. The protection plate 120 prevents the game ball from falling from the game area 12 to the rear, and protects the movable body 124 and the liquid crystal display unit 150 behind the game board.

  Further, since the protection plate 120 extends behind the game board 4a in a range larger than the opening area of the opening 4f, the protection plate 120 can further prevent the game ball from jumping in from the opening 4f to the rear. .

  On the front side of the protective plate 120, the periphery of the opening 4f is bordered by various decorative bodies (inner edge decorative body 66d, lower decorative body 67, etc.). The display screen of the liquid crystal display unit 150 is bordered. When the sizes of these borders are compared before and after, the border of the display screen by the peripheral decorative member 122 at the rear of the protective plate 120 is compared with the border on the front side of the protective plate 120. Is bigger. For this reason, the display screen size of the liquid crystal display unit 150 can be secured larger than the opening area of the opening 4f behind the protective plate 120, and a powerful effect display can be achieved. Is emphasized.

  In addition, the liquid crystal display unit 150 is provided behind the protective plate 120 at a position separated by a distance S. Therefore, a thickness (interval) in the front-rear direction is provided between the protective plate 120 and the display screen of the liquid crystal display unit 150. A space having S) is formed. The movable body 124 is disposed in the space, and the movable body 124 partially covers the display screen of the liquid crystal display unit 150 in a state where the movable body 124 is displaced to the position at the time of operation as illustrated.

  FIG. 9 schematically shows a configuration for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 1. The control of the pachinko machine 1 is roughly divided into a main board group and a peripheral board group, and among these, the main board group plays game operations (winning detection, winning judgment, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.) ), And a group of peripheral boards controls production operations (light emission decoration, sound output, liquid crystal display, etc.). All of these boards are installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and are normally visible or operated from the front side unless the main body frame 3 is opened after unlocking the main body frame 3. There is no. In addition to this, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a power supply board, a launch control board, an interface board (in the case of a CR machine), and the like. Is omitted.

  The main board group includes a main control board 201 and a payout board 205. The main control board 201 includes a CPU 202 as a central processing unit, a ROM 203 as a read-only memory, a RAM 204 as a readable / writable memory, and the like. Among these, the CPU 202 executes a game control program stored in the ROM 203 and controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 in accordance with the execution. Further, the CPU 202 creates a command (such as an effect command and a payout command) to be transmitted to the peripheral board group and the payout board 205. Further, the RAM 204 temporarily stores information such as various data and input signals generated in various processes executed by the main control board 201.

  The main control board 201 is connected to start port switches 68a and 70b, a gate switch 74b, a count switch 72a, a normal winning port switch 76a, and the like, and the main control board 201 receives detection signals from these switches. Entered. All electrical components except the start port switches 68a and 70b (gate switch 74b, count switch 72a, normal winning port switch 76a, solenoids 71a and 73a, special symbol display LED 144a, special symbol start memory LED 144b, normal symbol display LED 146a, The normal start memory LED 146b, the round display LED 148a, and the status display LED 148b) are connected to the main control board 201 via the panel relay terminal board 151.

  Specifically, the gate switch 74b is installed corresponding to the passing gate 74 in the gaming area 12, and when the game ball passes through the passing gate 74 in the process of flowing down, the passage is detected by the gate switch 74b, A detection signal is input to the main control board 201 via the panel relay terminal board 151. The start port switch 68a is installed corresponding to the upper start port 68, and the start port switch 70a is installed corresponding to the lower start port 70. Therefore, when a game ball wins the upper start opening 68 or the lower start opening 70, a detection signal is directly input to the main control board 201 from the corresponding start opening switches 68a and 70b. The count switch 72a is installed in correspondence with the big winning opening 72. When a game ball wins the big winning opening 72 during the big hit game, the count switch 72a is connected to the main control board 201 via the panel relay terminal board 151. A detection signal is input. The normal winning opening switch 76a is arranged corresponding to the normal winning opening 76, and when a game ball wins the normal winning opening 76, the main control board 201 is connected from the normal winning opening switch 76a via the panel relay terminal board 151. A detection signal is input to the.

  Then, the CPU 202 executes processing according to these input detection signals. That is, the CPU 202 applies the solenoids 71a and 73a, the special symbol display LED 144a, the special diagram start storage LED 144b, the normal symbol display LED 146a, the general diagram start storage LED 146b, the round display LED 148a, the status display LED 148b based on the input detection signal. Each drive signal is output via the panel relay terminal board 151. Furthermore, the CPU 202 outputs a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball according to the winning to the payout board 205.

  The payout board 205 also includes a payout CPU 206 as a central processing unit, a payout ROM 207 as a read-only memory, a payout RAM 208 as a readable / writable memory, and the like. When a winning of a game ball is detected by the start port switches 68a, 70b, the count switch 72a, the normal winning port switch 76a, etc., a detection signal from each switch is sent to the main control board 201 via the panel relay terminal plate 151. Is input. In the main control board 201, a payout command for instructing the payout board 205 to pay out a specified number of game balls is transmitted from the CPU 202 to the payout board 205 based on the input detection signal. Then, the payout board 205 processes the payout command received from the main control board 201, and outputs a drive signal to the payout device 209 (payout motor) to execute payout of a specified number of game balls. As a result, a specified number of game balls are actually paid out by the payout device 209.

  Further, a launching device 235 having a launching motor is connected to the payout board 205, and the launching device 235 can perform an operation of launching a game ball toward the game area 12 using the power of the launching motor. . When the player operates the operation handle 18 (twisting operation), the firing motor of the launching device 235 is driven, and thereby a game ball is launched.

  Although not shown in FIG. 9, the launcher 235 incorporates a touch sensor for detecting that the player's body is touching the operation handle 18. The firing device 235 is in a state where the firing motor can be driven when it is detected that the player is touching the operation handle 18. In this state, when the operation handle 18 is twisted clockwise from the initial position, the launching device 235 actually drives the launch motor to launch the game ball.

  Alternatively, a lower plate full tank switch is provided for detecting that the lower plate 17 is full, that is, the lower plate 17 is filled with paid out game balls, and a detection signal from the lower plate full tank switch is input. In this case, the operation of the operation handle 18 is controlled so as not to be accepted, and thus the driving of the firing motor by the firing device 235 can be made impossible. That is, the game balls paid out from the payout device 209 are temporarily stored in the upper plate 28. However, when a number of game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 28 are paid out, the amount of the game balls that cannot be stored. Are stored in the lower plate 17 communicating with the upper plate 28. In this state, the game ball is further paid out by the payout device 209, and when the lower plate 17 is finally full, a detection signal is output from the lower plate full tank switch, so that the operation of the operation handle 18 is accepted. Controlled to an impossible state. Further, in this case, when the detection signal from the lower pan full switch is not output, control may be performed to return to a state where the operation handle 18 can be accepted.

  The peripheral board group includes a sub-integrated board 211, a lamp driving board 156, a display control board 220, and the like. Of these, the sub-integrated board 211 includes an integrated CPU 212, an integrated ROM 213, and an integrated RAM 214. The sub-integrated board 211 includes a sound source IC 228 that performs control related to sound output, and also includes a sound ROM 227 as a read-only memory related to sound output. The integrated CPU 212 executes a process based on the effect command received from the main control board 201 by executing the effect control program stored in the integrated ROM 213. In addition, the integrated RAM 214 temporarily stores various data and input / output signals generated in various processes executed by the sub-integrated board 211, information such as effect commands received from the main control board 201, and the like. Then, when the integrated CPU 212 reads the effect command stored in the RAM 214, the integrated CPU 212 transmits a display command to the display control board 220 based on the read effect command, or sends a lamp lighting signal or drive to the lamp drive board 156. A signal is transmitted, or a drive signal is output to the frame lamp 27. Further, the sub integrated substrate 211 reads out a sound output mode based on the effect command by the sound source IC 228 from the sound ROM 227 and outputs a drive signal corresponding to the read sound output mode to the upper speaker 29 and the lower speaker 14. In addition, an operation signal is input to the integrated CPU 212 according to the operation of the operation button 18a, a detection signal is input from the receiving unit 90a according to an operation (operation signal) of the remote controller (remote controller) 90, or A detection signal of the movable body motor sensor 234 is input via the lamp driving substrate 156.

  The remote control 90 is provided with an ON / OFF operation button capable of switching the effect display of the liquid crystal display 50. When an ON / OFF operation button is operated by an administrator (store clerk) of a game hall that manages the remote controller 90, an operation signal is transmitted from the remote controller 90, and a receiving unit 90a provided on the front surface of the lower front member 16 (FIG. 1). When the operation signal is detected, the detection signal is input to the sub-integrated substrate 211. Then, in the sub integrated board 221, a display command for notifying that the ON / OFF operation button of the remote controller 90 has been operated is transmitted from the integrated CPU 212 to the display control board 220 based on the input detection signal. In this case, when it is determined that the remote controller 90 has been turned on, the liquid crystal display 50 notifies that fact, and the background image is shifted to the special background from the next variation display, and the remote controller 90 controls the display. When it is determined that the OFF operation has been performed, the fact is notified on the liquid crystal display 50, and the background image is shifted to the normal background from the next variation display, and display control is performed. Here, the special background effect display based on the reception of the operation signal from the remote controller 90 is from the start of the special background effect display until the upper limit number of times (in this embodiment, 30 times). Limited to period.

  In addition, when it becomes “probable short hit” or “small hit” described later, the probability variation state after the probable short hit gaming state based on “probable short hit” and the normal state after the small hit gaming state based on “small hit” By controlling the display of the same effect display, a chance effect that makes it difficult to determine which game state is the current game state is executed. However, for the period based on the reception of the operation signal from the remote controller 90 described above, even if the chance effect is executed based on “probability short hit” or “small hit”, the current gaming state is It is possible to determine whether the game state is the probability variation state or the normal state without making it difficult to determine.

  In this embodiment, infrared rays suitable for remote operation at a relatively short distance (several tens of cm to 1 m) are used for communication between the remote controller 90 and the receiver 90a. Thereby, the display of the liquid crystal display 50 is switched by operating the ON / OFF operation button from the remote controller 90 toward the receiving unit 90a on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 intended by the game hall administrator. Can do. In this embodiment, infrared communication is used for switching the effect display of the liquid crystal display 50. However, unlike the operation buttons 18 provided on the front frame 5, only the game hall manager can operate. Thus, the player may be inoperable. For example, wireless communication using radio waves or sound waves other than infrared rays may be used. When radio waves are used for wireless communication, an operation signal can be transmitted even at a location away from the receiving unit 90a without being obstructed by an obstacle. The operation signal can be transmitted simultaneously. In addition, an ON / OFF operation button capable of switching the effect display of the liquid crystal display 50 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 or the game board 4, and the game manager must be unlocked by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 24. For example, the ON / OFF operation button may be disabled.

  In addition, the switching of the effect display on the liquid crystal display 50 is provided as a service by a game hall manager to a specific player. During the game period of the player, even if the player is controlled multiple times in the big hit game state and has acquired a large amount of game balls, the same effect display as the player who was not controlled in the big hit game state ( Here, a normal background with a high display ratio) is repeatedly displayed, and the game may become monotonous. In this embodiment, a player who has acquired a large number of game balls exchanges a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 5 to 10 balls) to the game hall manager to turn on / off operation buttons on the remote controller 90. Can be requested to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 50 so that an unusual display (in this case, a special background with a very low display ratio) can be displayed. A sense of superiority can be obtained.

  Furthermore, the identification of a gaming state that is difficult to discriminate in chance production is also provided as a service by a game hall manager to a specific player. If the player becomes “probable short hit” or “small hit” during a game, it becomes difficult to determine whether the subsequent game state is a probability variation state or a normal state, and the expectation for the probability variation state is increased. While it can be sustained, it tends to make it difficult to develop game trends and countermeasures. For example, it is difficult for a player who wants to continue the game in the probability variation state but to stop the game in the normal state, so it is difficult to determine which game state it is, so the timing to stop the game I missed it. In this embodiment, the player can request the game hall manager to operate the ON / OFF operation button of the remote controller 90 by exchanging with a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 5 to 10 balls). Therefore, even if the chance production is executed based on “probability short hit” or “small hit”, it is possible to clarify the gaming state that is difficult to discern, and to obtain useful information for the player. it can.

  The switching of the effect display of the liquid crystal display 50 and the specification of the gaming state that is difficult to discriminate in the chance effect are not limited to exchange with a predetermined number of game balls. For example, when the game hall is opened, a specific date and time, Alternatively, it may be provided for bad gaming machines with customers. In this case, an effect display different from normal (here, a special background with a very low display ratio) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 50, so that interest in the gaming machine is increased and a player can be called. it can.

  The lamp driving board 156 transmits the lamp lighting signal received from the sub-integrated board 211 to the center LED boards 102, 104, 106, 108, 110, 112, 114, 116 and the side LED board 130. The drive signal received from is transmitted to the movable body drive unit motor 126. The center LED boards 102, 104, 106, 108, 110, 112, 114, 116, the side LED boards 130, and the movable body drive unit motor 126 are equipped in the rendering device 400, and of these, the center LED board 102 , 104, 106, 108, 110, 112, 114, 116 and the side LED substrate 130 are used for the light emission effect in the effect device 400, and the movable body driving unit motor 126 is used for driving the movable body 124. The lamp driving board 156 distributes the lamp lighting signal transmitted from the sub-integrated board 211 to each LED board and distributes the driving signal transmitted from the sub-integrated board 211 to the movable body driving unit motor 126. The sub-integrated board 211 controls the LED board and the movable body driving unit motor 126 substantially. Hereinafter, the lamp driving substrate 156 may be omitted for explanation.

  The display control board 220 includes a display CPU 221 as a central processing unit, a display ROM 222 as a read-only memory, and a display RAM 223 as a readable / writable memory. Among these, the display CPU 221 controls the liquid crystal display 50 based on a display command from the sub integrated substrate 211.

  Next, a game realized by the game board 4 provided with the various components and devices described above will be described. First, when a player twists the operation handle 18, a game ball is launched by a launching device 235 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. When the game ball launched from the launching device 235 rises along the launch rail 15 and the guide rail 11, it is released to the upper part of the game area 12, and then flows down while colliding with the obstacle nail or the like in the game area 12.

  When the game ball flowing down the game area 12 passes through the passage gate 74, the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate switch 74b, and the normal symbol display LED 146a (two light emitting areas 82a) changes the normal symbol based on this detection signal. Display (display mode in which green LEDs and red LEDs are alternately lit) is started.

  That is, when a game ball is detected by the gate switch 74b, the CPU 202 of the main control board 201 extracts a normal random number per symbol from a counter that updates the normal random number per symbol within a predetermined range. Then, the CPU 202 determines whether or not to win based on the normal symbol determination random number at the start of the variation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display LED 146a. The red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the green LED is turned on).

  Further, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 74 while the normal symbol display LED 146a displays the variation of the normal symbol, up to a predetermined number (4 in the present embodiment) of the normal symbols per unit of the normal symbol extracted by the CPU 202 is stored in the RAM 204. Remembered. At this time, the stored number of determination random numbers per normal symbol is displayed according to the lighting mode of the normal diagram start storage LED 146b (light emitting area 62b). Specifically, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate switch 74b while the passage of the passage gate 74 is valid (when the number of start memories of the normal symbol is less than 4), the normal start memory is stored each time. The lighting mode of the LED 146b is switched.

  In the present embodiment, for example, when the number of memorization start memory is 1, only one of the left memorial start memory LED 146b (light emitting area 62b) is lit, and when the number of memorization start memories increases further, In addition to the normal start memory LED 146b, the right general start memory LED 146b is lit in order. When the number of normal start memories reaches a maximum of 4, all of the four normal start memory LEDs 148 are in a blinking state. On the other hand, each time the normal symbol change display is started by the normal symbol display LED 146a, the number of the normal symbol start memory decreases by one. In this case, the normal symbol start memory is stored in the reverse manner to the above. The LED 148 is lit and blinks.

  In the present embodiment, when the CPU 202 determines that the winning is based on the normal symbol per random determination at the start of the normal symbol variation, the normal symbol display LED 146a (light emitting area 64c) is lit red after a predetermined period. The status is stopped and displayed. After that, the left and right movable pieces 70a are expanded by switching the solenoid 71a to the operating state (energized state), and the variable winning device is controlled to be open for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). Thereby, it will be in the state in which the winning to the lower start opening 70 is possible. After that, when a predetermined period has elapsed, control is performed to return the movable piece 70a to the initial position by returning the solenoid 71a to the non-operating state (non-energized state), and to return the variable winning device to the closed state.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 202 determines that the normal symbol change starts based on the random number per normal symbol at the start of normal symbol variation, the normal symbol display LED 146b (light emitting area 62b) stops in a state in which the normal symbol display LED 146 is lit in green after a predetermined period. In particular, the variable winning device is not controlled to be opened. Therefore, in this case, it is still impossible to win the lower start opening 70, but it is still possible to win the upper start opening 68.

  When a game ball flowing down in the game area 12 wins the upper start port 68 or the lower start port 70, the winning of the game ball is detected by the start port switch 68a or the start port switch 70a. In this case, the special symbol display LED 144a (four light emitting elements) is displayed in a state where the special symbol variation display can be started (for example, the state where the jackpot game is not being played or the special symbol / decorative symbol variation display is not performed). In the region 64 a), the special symbol variation display is started, and the liquid crystal display 50 starts the variation display of the decorative symbols (for example, those designed with the numbers “1” to “7”). In the present embodiment, the special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting of the four light emitting areas 64a. In addition, three decorative symbols are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 50: a left decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol, and all of these decorative symbols are scrolled in a certain direction on the screen. In this way, the display is changed. Note that the period during which the variable display is performed is determined within a range of several seconds to several tens of seconds according to the jackpot determination random number or other random numbers.

  When the special symbol or decorative symbol variation display is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined period, the special symbol is displayed in a specific mode in which the special symbol is a big hit (the combination of lighting of a plurality of light emitting areas 64a that are big hits: a big hit symbol). Then, the CPU 202 of the main control board 201 starts control of “big hit gaming state” or “probability short hit gaming state”. In addition, unlike the specific mode in which the special symbol at the time of stoppage is a big hit, it is displayed in a specific mode that is a small hit (a combination of lighting of a plurality of light emitting areas 64a that are small hits: a small hit symbol) The CPU 202 of the main control board 201 starts controlling the “small hit gaming state”.

  In addition, when the special symbol at the time of the stop is a specific display mode that is a big hit and control of the “hit game state” is started, the decorative symbols are stopped (all left, middle and right decorative symbols are stopped) ) Is also a specific mode (same decorative symbol combination: jackpot symbol). On the other hand, when the special symbol at the time of stop is a big hit and the control of the “probability short hit game state” control is started, and when the special symbol at the time of stop is a big hit, When the control of the “gaming state” is started, the chance effect entry symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol stop symbol. The chance effect rush symbol is a different symbol from the decorative symbol where the variable display is performed, and after entering the “probability short hit game state” or “small hit game state”, enter the “chance effect” described later. Is a symbol to notify the player. That is, when the game is not controlled to the “probability short hit game state” or the “small hit game state”, the symbol is not displayed.

  In the “big hit game state” and the “probable short win game state”, the CPU 202 performs a control to operate the solenoid 73a to open the condition operating device. That is, when the solenoid 73a is actuated, the opening / closing member 72a rotates with its lower edge portion as a fulcrum so as to fall down toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1, thereby enabling winning to the big winning opening 72. Such condition-actuating device release control may take a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds for “big hit gaming state”, 0.3 seconds for “probable short hit gaming state”) or a predetermined number of times The game is continued until either of the conditions that the count switch 73a detects that (for example, 10) game balls have won the big winning opening 72 is satisfied.

  When any of the above conditions is satisfied, the CPU 202 returns the solenoid 73a to a non-operating (non-energized) state, and raises the opening / closing member 72a that has been tilted forward until then along the board surface. As a result, the special winning opening 72 is closed, and the condition operating device is controlled to be closed. In the big hit gaming state or the probable short hit gaming state, the CPU 202 repeatedly executes a control in which one cycle of opening and closing (hereinafter, also referred to as a round) from when the condition operating device is opened to when it is returned to the closed state, When this control is repeated up to a predetermined number of times (15 rounds in the “big hit gaming state”, 2 rounds in the “probable short winning gaming state”), the big winning gaming state or the probable short winning gaming state is ended there. In the “hit game state”, the game balls are awarded one after another in the opened big prize opening 72, so that it is shorter than the game balls are awarded in the upper start opening 68, the lower start opening 70, the normal winning opening 76, etc. Since it is possible to acquire a large amount of game balls, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player.

  Here, in the “probable short hit game state”, the release control of the condition actuating device is performed in a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) significantly shorter than the “big hit game state”, and the open / close cycle is set to “big hit game”. The probabilistic short win game state is ended when it is repeated for an interval shorter than the “state” (for example, 2 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (2 rounds) less than the “big hit game state”. As described above, in the “probability short hit gaming state”, the opening time of the conditional operation device is extremely shortened (less than 1 second) in one opening / closing cycle, and thus it is difficult to notice the opening of the conditional operation device.

  Further, in the “small hit gaming state”, the CPU 202 performs control for operating the solenoid 73a to open the conditional action device, similar to the “probability short hit gaming state”. In general, a condition actuating device is a device that operates when a special symbol stop symbol is displayed in a specific manner that is a big hit, and it does not operate even if it is displayed in any other manner, but here The display is controlled in a similar manner to the case where it is displayed in a specific mode that is a big hit even if it is displayed in a specific mode that is a big hit. In the “small hit game state”, the release control of the condition actuating device is performed in a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) that is significantly shorter than the “big hit game state”, and the opening / closing cycle is set to be less than the “big hit game state”. When repeated for a short interval (for example, 2 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (2 rounds) smaller than the “big hit gaming state”, the small hit gaming state is terminated. However, even if the predetermined time or the predetermined number of times set in the “small hit game state” has not been reached, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have won the big winning opening 72 since the start of the small hit game state. Is detected by the count switch 73a, the small hit gaming state is terminated. Even in the small hit gaming state, the opening time of the conditional operation device is extremely shortened (less than 1 second) in one opening / closing cycle, so that it is difficult to notice the opening of the conditional operation device.

  In this embodiment, when controlled to the probable short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the condition operating device is controlled to open. By shortening the interval and reducing the number of times of opening and closing, it is configured to make it difficult to win a large amount of game balls in the big winning opening 72. That is, since the opening time of the condition operating device is extremely short, it is difficult to win a game ball to the big winning opening 72, and the number of game balls to be paid out is smaller than in the big hit gaming state. In this way, when the special symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a specific mode in which a big hit is obtained, it is highly possible that a large number of game balls will be obtained or a low possibility that a large number of game balls will be obtained. While it is controlled to one of the "probability short hit game state" while the special symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a small hit, it is possible to obtain as many game balls as the "probable short hit game state" Control to a “small hit gaming state” with low performance.

  In the present embodiment, the left, middle and right decorative symbols are controlled to stop in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol. The decorative symbol stop symbol is a symbol in which all the left, middle and right decorative symbols are stopped when the left, middle and right decorative symbols start to change and the middle decorative symbol is stopped. A combination of

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific mode that is a big hit displayed when the special symbol is stopped includes a special mode (a combination of lighting of a plurality of light emitting areas 64a that are probable big hits). When the control of the “big hit gaming state” is started in a special mode, the decorative symbol stop symbol also becomes a special mode (probability variable big hit symbol: in this embodiment, a combination of the same odd number of symbols). In this case, it becomes a so-called “probable big hit”, and after the big hit gaming state is finished, the probability of winning next big hit gaming state (winning probability, big hit probability) becomes high (in this embodiment, 1/70 in the probability variation state). It is a probability, and is a probability of 1/490 except for the probability fluctuation state.) That is, when the special symbol at the time of stoppage is a special mode, it becomes a more advantageous state for the player in the “probability variation state” after the jackpot game is over. In addition, after the “probability short win game state” is controlled, the “probability variation state” is also controlled.

  In this embodiment, when the probability variation state is reached after the jackpot game based on the “probability variation jackpot” is ended, the jackpot probability is increased, and the time-shortening control is performed. That is, in the probability variation state, the control for reducing the variation time from the start of the special symbol display on the special symbol display LED 144a (four light emitting areas 64a) to the stop display of the special symbol from the normal state. Symbol display LED 146a (light emitting area 82a) Control for reducing the fluctuation time from the start of normal symbol variation display until the normal symbol is stopped to display than normal state, normal symbol display LED 146a (light emitting region 82a) Control for increasing the probability that the result of the fluctuation display is “hit”, the movable piece 70a that is opened based on the fact that the result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is “hit” at the normal symbol display LED 146a (light emitting area 82a). Control for extending the opening time from the normal state (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds in the normal state, in the short time state and the probability variation state, .8 seconds), control for increasing the number of times that the variable prize-winning device is opened compared to the normal state (in this embodiment, once in the normal state, three times in the short-time state and the probability variation state), etc. Short time control is also performed. In addition, if the probability variation state after the probability variation short hit game based on “probability short hit” is reached, the big hit probability is increased, but in addition, the time reduction control is not performed.

  On the other hand, in the case of a so-called “non-probable big hit” that does not become a probability fluctuation state after the big hit game ends, the number of times that the special symbol fluctuation display is executed reaches a predetermined number (100 times in this embodiment). Time reduction control is performed, and the player is in a “time reduction state” advantageous state for the player. In the short-time control, the winning probability to the lower start opening 70 is increased, and the number of executions of the special symbol variation display within a certain period can be increased (that is, the jackpot determination opportunity is increased). It becomes an advantageous state for the person. The normal state means a state that is not the probability variation state or the time-short state described above.

  In the present embodiment, a game ball wins the upper start opening 68, and when it is detected by the start opening switch 68a, a predetermined number of 3 game balls are paid out. When a winning is made and detected by the start port switch 70b, a predetermined number of four game balls are paid out. Thus, the following effects are produced by providing a difference in the number of payouts between the upper start port 68 and the lower start port 70.

  That is, the lower start opening 70 is normally closed by the movable piece 70a, and the structure is such that there is no chance of winning unless the result of the normal symbol variation display is “winning”, whereas the upper start opening 68 is Since it is a structure that can always accept a game ball from above, if there are too many payouts for a single game ball winning to the upper start opening 68, the player will be more advantageous than the game hall operator. . If it does so, winning a prize to a starting opening (upper starting opening 68 and lower starting opening 70) will be controlled as a measure for resolving a disadvantage of a game hall operator, and, as a result, determination game (determination of whether or not to make a big hit gaming state) ) May cause discomfort to the player. On the other hand, if the number of payouts for winning at the upper start opening 68 is too small, the number of game balls required for the judgment game increases, resulting in excessive investment, which is inconvenient for the player. It will give you a profit.

  On the other hand, the lower start opening 70 provides a game advantageous to the player in the short time state and the probability variation state, and the lower start opening 54 is controlled by extending the opening time and the number of opening times of the movable piece 70a. The probability of winning is increased. However, if the number of payouts for winning a game ball is too small, the number of payouts will be reduced relative to the number of shot balls, and the remaining number of game balls will gradually decrease in spite of the advantageous game state. By doing so, the player will be uncomfortable. In consideration of these events, the number of payouts (three or four) for each of the upper start port 68 and the lower start port 70 is set in the present embodiment.

  The display result of the special symbol on the special symbol display LED 144a corresponds to the display result of the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display 50. That is, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is not made at the start of the change of the special symbol, the LED (four light emitting areas) is different from the specific mode that is the big hit or the small hit, that is, the mode of losing. 64a) is turned on and the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the liquid crystal display 50, the mode of detachment (the detachment symbol: a symbol other than the jackpot symbol, in this embodiment, a combination of at least two types of identification information (symbol)) As a result, an image of the decorative design is displayed.

  Also, the decorative symbol is a symbol for the production different from the special symbol, and the contents of the special symbol variation display (flashing of the four light emitting areas 64a) are expressed in a dramatic manner by the variation display of the ornamental decoration symbol. This enhances the visual effect. In other words, when the special symbol display LED 144a is lit and displayed in a specific manner that is a big hit, control to shift to the big hit gaming state is performed. However, when the special symbol display LED 144a is not lit and displayed in a specific manner, control to shift to the big hit gaming state or the probable short winning gaming state is not performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of opening and closing times that the condition operating device is controlled to open is set to “15 times” in the “big hit gaming state”, while in the “probable short hit gaming state” and the “small hit gaming state”, “ “Twice” is set. Here, it may be configured to be controllable to a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states with different benefits given to the player, for example, to a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states with different numbers of rounds executed in the jackpot gaming state. You may comprise so that it may control. In this case, after determining the big hit based on the big hit determination random number, the number of rounds to be executed in the big hit gaming state may be determined, or different round numbers may be set based on the big hit determination random number It may be determined whether to control any one of the plurality of types of big hit gaming states.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the state display LED 148b (four light emitting areas 82d) is made to correspond to the gaming state of the above-described probability variation state (probability variation state with time reduction control), time reduction state, jackpot gaming state, and the current gaming state The state display LED 148b (one light emitting area 82d) is controlled to be turned on, and the other state display LEDs 148b (three light emitting areas 82d) are controlled to be turned off. However, in the game state of the probability change short hit game state, the small hit game state, the probability change state after the probability change short hit game state (the probability change state not accompanied by the time reduction control), and the normal game state after the small hit game state, the state display LED 148b There is no lighting control.

  In the present embodiment, the round display LED 148a (two light emitting areas 82c) described above is turned on during execution of the big hit gaming state or the probability variation short winning gaming state. Specifically, the LED corresponding to the light emitting area 82c on the right side of the round display LED 148a is turned on during execution of the big hit gaming state, and the LED corresponding to the light emitting area 82c on the left side is turned on during execution of the probable short hit gaming state. Execute control. In this embodiment, as the number of rounds in which the condition operating device is controlled to open, it is possible to control the big hit gaming state in which “15 times” is set and the probability variable short hit gaming state in which “2 times” is set. By controlling the turning on / off of the round display LED 148a corresponding to these two types of rounds, the type of the big hit gaming state can be grasped from the outside. As described above, it is understood that the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is also applicable to a configuration that can be controlled to a plurality of types of big hit gaming states. Note that the round display LED 148a is not lit while the small hit gaming state is being executed.

  Next, various control processes executed on the main control board 201 in accordance with the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 17. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the CPU 202 mounted on the main control board 201. FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing at the time of power-off occurrence. FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 13 is a list showing random numbers updated on the main control board 201. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the game process. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the variation start process. FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit determination process. FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display pattern setting process. FIG. 18 is a list showing an example of the variable display pattern table. Note that the timer interrupt process is executed by the CPU 202 mounted on the main control board 201 at a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, every 4 ms).

  As shown in FIG. 10, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the CPU 202 executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM 204 is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). If normal, the backup data stored in the RAM 204 is used. Execute processing to restore the power outage (power recovery processing), and if the backup data is abnormal, clear RAM 204 and perform CPU peripheral device settings (normal initial settings: interrupt timing settings, etc.) . When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM 204 as backup data. If the RAM erase switch for instructing the clearing of the backup data stored in the RAM 204 is turned on in the power-on process, the RAM 204 is cleared and normal initialization is performed. If the backup data is not stored in the RAM 204 mounted on the main control board 201 in the power-on process, the RAM 204 is cleared and normal initialization is performed. In the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 201 is activated to the sub-integrated board 211 when normal initial setting is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the sub integrated board 211 that the main control board 201 has been activated. Note that the backup data is also stored in the RAM 204 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the amusement store is closed, etc. Processing at the time of execution is executed.

  When the power-on process ends, the CPU 202 starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop process, the CPU 202 first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by a power supply board (not shown). That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Supplying to the device. Therefore, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board is equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 201 is stopped. Sent. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the CPU 202 mounted on the main control board 201 in step S2, a process at the time of occurrence of power interruption is executed (step S4). This power-off process is performed when the power supply voltage supplied to the power supply board after a power failure is restored (24V in this embodiment) (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), and the operation of the gaming machine is in a state before the power failure. This is a process of storing the state at the time of the occurrence of a power failure as backup data in the RAM 204 in order to start from the above. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing at the time of power-off occurrence is not an interrupt processing, but a branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  When the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, random number update processing 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S3). . The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process (step S4) at the time of power-off occurrence. As described above, the power-off occurrence process is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. First, the CPU 202 performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM 204 is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 204 (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the content of the RAM 204 before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

  Next, the CPU 202 sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 204 (step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the CPU 202 prohibits access to the RAM 204 (step S4d) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for stopping power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power outage”), Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop in the above processing. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the CPU 202 of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed. However, the watchdog timer enters the process when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even when the power interruption occurs due to an instantaneous power failure and the infinite loop shown in FIG. 11 is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period of time, and the CPU 202 is started in the same process as when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. As described above, in this embodiment, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the CPU 202 mounted on the main control board 201 during the execution of the main process. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 202 executes the process from step S11 to step S19 after executing the register saving process (step S10). In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signals of the above-described switches (gate switch 74b, start port switches 68a and 70b, count switch 72a, normal winning switch 76a, etc.) is executed. In the payout operation process in step S12, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout board 205 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11). In the random number update process 1 in step S13, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well.

  Moreover, in the game process of step S14, the process which controls the pachinko machine 1 according to the progress state of a game is performed. In the normal symbol game of step S15, the control process related to the normal symbol display LED 146a is executed. In the ordinary electric accessory game in step S16, processing for opening / closing control of the opening / closing member 56a is executed. In the special symbol game in step S17, control is executed to display the special symbol display LED 144a in a variable manner based on the result of the game process (step S14). In the special electric accessory game of step S18, the solenoid 73a is controlled to move and the opening / closing control of the opening / closing member 72a is executed. In the command transmission output process of step S19, a process of transmitting the effect command set in the game process (step S14) to the sub integrated board 211 is executed. In the command transmission output process (step S19), a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the sub-integrated board 211 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started. Done. In the I / O port output process of step S20, a process of outputting a state signal indicating a gaming state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer), a process of outputting a drive signal to the special figure start memory lamp 147, etc. Execute. When the processing from step S11 to step S20 is executed, the register restoration processing (step S21) is executed, and the processing is terminated.

  Here, various random numbers updated by the CPU 202 mounted on the main control board 201 in the random number update process 1 (step S13) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, the jackpot determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate the jackpot gaming state or the probabilistic short hit gaming state (jackpot determination), When a big hit gaming state is generated together with a determination whether to generate a big hit gaming state or a probable variable short hit gaming state when it is determined that a big hit gaming state or a probable variable short hit gaming state is generated in the big hit determination Probability determination random number used for determining whether or not to make a probable big hit when judged (probability change determination), a small hit game when it is determined that a big hit gaming state or a probable short hit gaming state does not occur in the big hit determination Small hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a state (small hit determination), big hit gaming state, probable short hit gaming state and small Reach determination random number used for determination (reach determination) whether or not to make a detachment with a reach mode when it is determined that none of the game states will be generated, the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display LED 144a Fluctuation display pattern random number used to determine the variable display pattern of the symbol, Random number for normal symbol used for determination of whether or not the movable piece 70a of the lower start port 70 is controlled to be open (determination for normal symbol) , Etc.

  Note that the variable display pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number, and the variable display pattern of the decorative symbol controlled by the liquid crystal display 50 may be determined. Further, a probabilistic short hit determination random number may be provided separately from the big hit determination random number, and the determination as to whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state and the determination as to whether or not to generate a probable short hit gaming state may be performed separately. In this case, when it is determined that the big hit determination random number is not used to generate the big hit gaming state, the probability variable short hit determination random number is used to determine whether or not the probability variable short hit gaming state is generated. Using a random number, it is only necessary to determine whether or not to make a probable big hit.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number update processing 1, the big hit determination random number, the probability variation determination random number, the small hit determination random number, and the normal symbol determination random number are updated. That is, the random number used for the determination regarding whether or not the game state (big hit game state, small hit game state, probability variation state) advantageous to the player is generated and whether or not the movable piece 70a of the lower start port 70 is controlled to the open state Is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability (for example, the probability of determining that a big hit gaming state is generated, the probability of determining that the movable piece 70a of the lower start port 70 is controlled to be opened) in each random number in a predetermined period is constant. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the reach determination random number and the variable display pattern random number are updated regardless of the occurrence of a gaming state advantageous to the player and the display result of the normal symbol. Note that the random numbers updated by the main control board 201 are not limited to those described above. In the random number update processing 2, the initial value of the big hit determination random number that starts counting next when the counter that updates the big hit determination random number makes one round. The initial value determination random number for determining the value is also updated.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the game process (step S14). In the game control process, the CPU 202 first determines whether or not a game ball has won the upper start opening 68 and the lower start opening 70 (step S30). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the start port switches 68a and 70b, and when a detection signal is output from the start port switches 68a and 70b, the upper start port 68 and the lower start port 70 are output. If it is determined that the game ball has won (YES in step S30) and no detection signal is output from the start port switches 68a and 70b, no game ball has been won in the upper start port 68 and the lower start port 70 ( In step S30, NO is determined. When it is determined in step S30 that a game ball has won the upper start port 68 and the lower start port 70, various random numbers (big hit determination random number, probability variation determination random number, small hit determination random number, etc.) are acquired and provided in the RAM 204. It is determined whether or not the value of the held ball number counter is less than 4 which is the upper limit value (step S31). Then, if the held ball number counter is less than 4 in step S31, start memory storage processing is performed (step S32). If the start port switches 68a and 70b are not turned on in step S30 and if the value of the reserved ball number counter is 4 in step S31, the start storage storing process is not executed. Thereafter, the CPU 202 refers to the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress of the game and performs any one of steps S40 to S44.

  In the start memory storage process, a process of adding “1” to the held ball number counter and a process of changing the lighting display mode (the number of LEDs to be turned on) of the special figure start memory LED 144b in accordance with the addition of the held ball number counter. And the obtained random number value (in this embodiment, the big hit determination random number, the probability variation random number, and the small hit determination random number) are stored in the storage area of the start memory provided in the RAM 204 in correspondence with the count value of the reserved ball number counter. And processing to perform. As described above, the reserved ball number counter is a counter indicating the number of random values stored in the storage area of the start memory. If the value of the reserved ball number counter is the upper limit value in step S31, the random number value acquired in step S30 is discarded. When it is determined in step S30 that a game ball has won the upper start opening 68 or the lower start opening 70, various random numbers may be acquired between step S30 and step S32. For example, various random numbers are acquired in step S30. Instead, after it is determined in step S31 that the reserved ball number counter is less than the upper limit value, various random numbers may be acquired, or may be acquired in the start storage storage process (step S32).

  In the variation start process (step S40) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the start memory number is confirmed. If the start memory number is not 0, the setting for starting the variation display of the special symbol is made. Do. Specifically, as will be described later, specifically, it is determined whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state or a probable short hit gaming state, and when generating a big hit gaming state or a probable short winning game state, Is determined, and when it is determined that the big hit gaming state is to be generated, it is determined whether or not the probability change big hit is to be made. Further, when the big hit gaming state and the probability variation short hit gaming state are not generated, it is determined whether or not the small hit gaming state is to be generated. In the variable display pattern setting process (step S41) executed when the process selection flag is “1”, settings relating to the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols are performed. Specifically, although the details will be described later, the variation display pattern of the special symbol is determined, and the variation time set corresponding to the variation display pattern (after the variation display of the special symbol is started by the special symbol display LED 144a) Set the timer until the stop display.

  Further, in the changing process (step S42) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, the timer set with the changing time in the changing display pattern setting process (step S41) is monitored, and the timer has timed out. Based on this, the special symbol display LED 144a performs a process of stopping the special symbol variation display. At this time, if it is determined that the big hit gaming state, the probability variation short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is made in the variation start process (step S40), the process selection flag is updated to “3”, the big hit gaming state, If it is not determined that the probability variation short hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are made, the processing selection flag is updated to “0”.

  Further, in the hit game start process (step S43) executed when the process selection flag is “3”, a setting for starting the big hit game state, the probability variation short hit game state, or the small hit game state is performed. Specifically, a big hit start command for instructing execution of a big hit gaming state start display based on the start of the big hit gaming state, or a chance effect entry display based on the start of the probability variable short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state A short hit start command for instructing execution is transmitted to the sub-integrated substrate 211, and the number of times of opening the condition operation device and the opening time are set.

  Further, in the hit game processing (step S44) executed when the process selection flag is “4”, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 72a is determined when the big hit game state is started, When a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls wins the big winning opening 72 or when a predetermined period (30 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, the condition operating device is closed. In addition to performing a process for performing the process, a command for hitting a jackpot that instructs execution of a display (for example, round display or the like) in a jackpot gaming state is transmitted to the sub integrated board 211. If the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state has not reached the predetermined number (15 in this embodiment), the process for opening the conditional operation device is performed again, and the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is When the predetermined number of times is reached, a jackpot end command is sent to the sub-integrated board 211 to instruct execution of end display of the jackpot gaming state, and the process selection flag is updated to “0”.

  In addition, when a probable short hit game state or a small hit game state is started, a process for putting the condition operating device into a closed state when a predetermined period (0.3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed. And a short hit opening / closing start command and a short hit command for instructing the sub-integrated board 211 to execute sound output (for example, short hit opening / closing start, short hit opening / closing end, etc.) during the probability changing short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. A hit opening / closing end command is transmitted. If the number of times of opening and closing in the probability variation short hit game state or the small hit game state has not reached the predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, two times), a process for opening the conditional action device again is performed, When the number of times of opening and closing in the probable short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times, a short hit end command for instructing the end of the chance effect rush display is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 211 and the process selection flag is set to “ Update to "0". However, in the “small hit game state”, a condition is met when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the big winning opening 72 from the start of the small hit game state even if the predetermined period or the predetermined number of times have not been reached. Processing is performed to bring the actuator into a closed state.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation start process (step S40). In the change start process, the CPU 202 determines whether or not the value of the reserved ball number counter is 0 (step S401). As described above, since the value of the held ball number counter indicates the number of random numbers stored in the start memory storage area, if the value of the held ball number counter is 0 in step S401, the start memory is stored. It is determined that there is no data, and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the reserved ball number counter is not 0 in step S401, a start memory transfer process is executed (step S402). In the start memory transfer process, the process of subtracting 1 from the reserved ball number counter, and after shifting various random numbers stored in the start memory storage area provided in the RAM 204, the stored ball counter of the start memory storage area A process of reading various random numbers (such as jackpot determination random numbers) stored in the storage area corresponding to 0 is performed. Specifically, various random numbers stored in the storage area corresponding to n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4) of the reserved ball number counter in the storage area of the start memory are stored in the storage area of the start memory. The number is stored in a storage area corresponding to n-1 (n = 0, 1, 2, 3) of the number counter.

  Next, in step S402, the big hit game state, the probable short win game state using the big hit determination random number, the probability variation determination random number, and the small hit determination random number read from the storage region corresponding to 0 of the reserved ball number counter in the storage region of the reserved memory. Alternatively, after determining whether or not any game state of the small hit gaming state is to be generated, and performing hit determination processing for determining whether or not to make a promising big hit when generating the big hit gaming state (step S403) ), The processing selection flag is updated to “1” (step S404). By updating the process selection flag to “1”, the timer interrupt process occurs next, and the variable display pattern setting process (step S41) can be executed when the game process (step S14) is executed.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the hit determination process (step S404). In the winning determination process, the CPU 202 determines whether or not the probability variation flag set in the winning game process (step S44) is ON (is set) (step S51). If the probability variation flag is ON, the probability variation state big hit judgment table (not shown) is selected (step S52). If the probability variation state flag is not ON (if it is OFF), the big hit in the normal / short time state A determination table (not shown) is selected (step S53). In the jackpot determination table in the probability variation state, the jackpot determination is determined to generate the jackpot gaming state or the probability variation short hit gaming state by matching the jackpot determination random number among 980 jackpot determination random numbers from 0 to 979. Fourteen values are set, and the jackpot probability, which is the probability of hitting the jackpot or the probability variation shortcut, is 1/70. On the other hand, in the normal / short time state big hit determination table, two big hit determination values are set out of 980 big hit determination random numbers from 0 to 979, and the big hit probability is 1/490.

  Then, the determination value set in the probability change state big hit determination table selected in steps S52 and S53, or the normal / short-time state big hit determination table, and the value of the big hit determination random number read out in the start memory transfer process in step S402 Whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state or a probable short hit gaming state is determined (step S54). The determination value set in the probability change state big hit determination table selected in steps S52 and S53, or the normal / short-time state big hit determination table, and the value of the big hit determination random number read in the start memory transfer process in step S402 (hold) The big hit flag is turned on when it is determined that a big hit gaming state or a probable short hit gaming state is generated based on the match with the value of the big hit judgment random number stored in the save area corresponding to 0 of the ball counter After setting the state (set) (step S55), it is determined whether to generate a big hit gaming state or a probability changing short hit gaming state based on a probability change determination table (not shown) in which a predetermined determination value is set. In addition, when it is determined that a big hit gaming state is to be generated, it is determined whether or not to make a probable big hit (step by step). Flop S56).

  Specifically, it is set in the probability variation determination table and the value of the probability variation determination random number read in the start memory transition process in step S402 (value of the probability variation determination random number stored in the storage area corresponding to 0 of the reserved ball number counter). Probabilistic large hits that control to a probability variation state after the end of the big hit gaming state, non-probable big hits that do not control to the probability fluctuation state after the end of the big hit gaming state, and a probable short hit per game It is determined which of the probability variation short hits (short hits) to be controlled to the probability variation state after the end of the state is generated. In the probability variation judgment table, each criterion value is set so that the probability of probability variation big hit is 5/8, the proportion of non-probable variation big hit is 1/4, and the proportion of probability variation short hit is 1/8. It is set in the probability variation judgment table. That is, the probability variation state is determined to be a probability variation state among eight probability variation determination random numbers from 0 to 7 so that the probability variation entry rate (the ratio of occurrence of the probability variation state in the hit) becomes 3/4. Number of judgment values is set.

  In step S56, the determination (probability variation big hit) is controlled based on the fact that the determination value set in the probability variation determination table matches the value of the probability variation determination random number read out in the start-up memory transfer process in step S402. Alternatively, when the probability variation short hit is made, the probability variation state flag is turned on (set) (step S57). If it is determined in step S56 that the probability variation state is to be determined to be the probability variation short hit, the big hit flag is turned off (reset) and the probability variation short hit flag is turned on (set) ( Step S60). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S56 that the control is not performed in the probability variation state (non-probability big hit), the process ends without executing the processes of steps S57 to S59.

  If it is determined in step S54 that the big hit gaming state and the probability variation short hit gaming state are not to be generated, a small hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S60), and the determination value set in the small hit determination table is set. Depending on whether or not the value of the small hit determination random number read in the start memory transfer process in step S402 (the value of the small hit determination random number stored in the storage area corresponding to 0 of the reserved ball number counter) matches, It is determined whether or not a small hit gaming state is generated (step S61). Then, it is determined that the small hit gaming state is generated based on the determination value set in the small hit determination table being coincident with the value of the small hit determination random number read in the start-up memory transfer process in step S402. Sometimes, the small hit flag is turned on (set) (step S62). In the small hit determination table, 14 small hit determination values determined to generate a small hit gaming state by matching among 980 small hit determination random numbers from 0 to 979 are set. The small hit probability that is the probability of becoming 1/70.

  Note that the ON / OFF states (set state and reset state) of the big hit flag, the probability change short hit flag, the small hit flag, and the probability change state flag are stored in the RAM 204. Also, the OFF state (reset state) of the big hit flag, the probable short hit flag, the small hit flag and the probable change state flag means that a value of “0” is set, and the ON state (set state) is “1”. The value of is set.

  The big hit flag is a flag indicating the control for shifting to the big hit gaming state. If the big hit flag is set in the big hit game starting process (step S43), the big hit gaming state is generated. The probability variation short hit flag is a flag indicating the transition control to the probability variation short hit gaming state. If the probability variation short hit flag is set in the winning game start process (step S43), the probability variation short hit gaming state is displayed. generate. Further, the small hit flag is a flag indicating control for shifting to the small hit game state. If the small hit flag is set in the hit game start process (step S43), the small hit game state is generated. When the big hit gaming state, the probability variation short hit gaming state, and the small hit gaming state are ended in the hit game processing (step S44), processing for resetting the big hit flag, the probability variable short hit flag, and the small hit flag is executed. The

  Further, the probability variation state flag is a flag indicating the transition control to the probability variation state after the big hit gaming state ends or the probability variation short hit gaming state ends. If the probability variation state flag is set when the state is ended, the probability variation state flag is reset, and a process of setting the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is executed. In the state in which the probability variation flag is set, the probability variation state is controlled as described above. For example, the probability variation state big hit determination table in step S52 described above is selected and the state other than the probability variation state (normal state, time reduction state). The probability of determining that a big hit gaming state is to be generated is increased. If the probability variation flag is set in the winning game start processing (step S43), processing for resetting the probability variation flag is executed.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display pattern setting process (step S41). In the variation display pattern setting process, the CPU 202 determines whether or not to make a hit (probability large hit, non-probable variation big hit, probability variation short hit, or small hit) as a result of the current variation display, that is, a hit flag (big hit flag, It is determined whether the probability variation short hit flag or the small hit flag is set (step S410). If the hit flag is set (ON state), the variation display pattern corresponding to the hit flag and the probability variation state flag is set. A table (see FIG. 18) is selected (step S411). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is set and the probability variation status flag is also set, select the probability variation jackpot variation display pattern table in which the variation display pattern used when the probability variation jackpot is set, When the big hit flag is set, if the probability variation state flag is reset, the non-probability big hit variation display pattern table in which the variation display pattern used in the case of the non-probability variation big hit is set is selected. In addition, if the probability variation short hit flag is set (the probability variation status flag is also set at this time), select the probability variation short variation variation display pattern table in which the variation display pattern used for the probability variation short hit is set, If the small hit flag is set, the small hit hour variation display pattern table in which the variation display pattern used in the case of the small hit is set is selected.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S410 (if it is in the OFF state), a reach determination random number is acquired and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 204, and a reach determination table in which a predetermined determination value is set. It is determined whether or not the reach is determined based on whether or not the determination value set to the value of the acquired reach determination random number matches (step S412). When it is determined that the reach mode is selected, a reach-time variation display pattern table (see FIG. 18) in which a variation display pattern showing a mode for deviating the symbol accompanying the reach mode is set is selected (step S413), and reach is performed. When it is determined not to be an aspect, an out-of-fluctuation variation display pattern table (see FIG. 18) in which a variation display pattern showing an aspect for deriving a loss symbol without a reach aspect is set is selected (step S414). In the reach determination table, the reach probability (reach mode ratio) is 1 / 12.5, that is, two determination values out of 25 reach determination random numbers from 0 to 24 are reach determination. Set in the table.

  Then, the variable display pattern random number is acquired and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 204, and the probability variation large hit variation display pattern table, the non-probable variation large hit variation display pattern table selected in steps S411, S413, and S414, the probability variation short, and the like. The judgment value set in any one of the fluctuation display pattern table of the hit fluctuation display pattern table, the small hit fluctuation display pattern table, the reach fluctuation display pattern table, and the deviation fluctuation display pattern table, and the obtained fluctuation The variable display pattern is determined to match the display pattern random number (step S415). In steps S411, S413, and S414, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is in the ON state in each variation display pattern table. If the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is in the ON state, the probability variation / time reduction state is used. If the variation display pattern table is selected and the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are OFF, the normal state variation display pattern table is selected.

  The hour / short flag is a flag that is set when it is determined in step S56 of the hit determination process that the probability variation big hit and the probability variation short hit are not made (non-probability variable big hit), and the hit game process (step S44) is performed. And processing to be set when the big hit gaming state is finished. When the time reduction flag is set, the time is controlled to the time reduction state. For example, in step S414, the variation time 2 of “variation of shortening” of the variation number 2 in which the variation time of the special symbol is shortened from the normal state from the variation display pattern table at the time of deviation. A variable display pattern is selected. In addition, when it is determined that the next big hit gaming state is to be generated in step S54 of the hit determination process until the predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays is executed after the big hit gaming state ends, or after the big hit gaming state ends. When the special symbol variation display is executed the number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times), processing for resetting the time reduction flag is executed. Here, if it is determined in step S54 of the hit determination process that the probability variation short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is to be generated before the special symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times after the big hit gaming state ends, The process for resetting the time flag is not executed. That is, of the predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays, the remaining number of times that was not executed until the probability variation short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is generated is executed after the probability variation short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state ends. Is done. In addition, when the hourly flag is set, the number counter is set to a predetermined number, and 1 is subtracted every time it is determined whether or not to make a big hit in the hit determination process, so that a special number of special symbols is given after the end of the big hit gaming state. It is determined whether or not the variable display is executed. Further, the ON / OFF state (set state, reset state) of the time reduction flag is stored in the RAM 204. Further, the OFF state (reset state) of the time reduction flag means that a value of “0” is set, and the ON state (set state) of the time reduction flag means that a value of “1” is set.

  Next, a variation display pattern command is set as an effect command for designating the variation display pattern determined in step S415 (step S416), and a variation time corresponding to the variation display pattern is provided in the RAM 204 mounted on the main control board 201. Is set to a timer (in this embodiment, a valid period timer) (step S417). In step S417, the variation time set in the variation display pattern determined in step S415 is set in the effective period timer. Note that the variable display pattern command set in step S416 is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 211 in the command transmission output process (step S19). Further, when a variable display pattern command is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 211 by the command transmission output process, a special signal game outputs a drive signal to the special symbol display LED 144a to start the special symbol variable display.

  Here, the fluctuation display pattern command is data of 2 bytes, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed in each fluctuation display pattern command after the special symbol display LED 144a starts the fluctuation display of the special symbol. Data for specifying the fluctuation time and reach production to be included. Of the 2-byte variable display pattern command, the first byte is data that can specify a variable display pattern, and the second byte is data that can specify a variable number (variable display pattern). . That is, the integrated CPU 212 mounted on the sub-integrated board 211 can recognize the variable display pattern based on the first byte data, and further specifies the variable display pattern based on the second byte data. .

  The variation display pattern determined in step S415 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a list chart showing an example of the variable display pattern. The liquid crystal display 50 follows the variation display pattern during the special symbol variation time (the time from when the special symbol variation display is started by the special symbol display LED 144a until the special symbol variation display is stopped). The effect mode is displayed as an image.

  The “normal fluctuation” of the fluctuation number 1 is a fluctuation display pattern without a reach mode. The variation number 2 “shortening variation” is a variation display pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shorter than the “normal variation”. The “normal reach” of the variation numbers 3 and 4 is a variation display pattern in which the super reach effect is not executed after the normal reach effect is executed with the reach mode. In addition, the super reach production is executed after the execution of the normal reach production. It is a reach production that continues from the beginning.

  In addition, the “single reach” of the fluctuation numbers 5 to 16 is a decorative pattern (in this embodiment, which is not yet stopped and displayed according to the music flowing during the production period as the super reach production after the execution of the normal reach production. It is a variable display pattern which performs the song reach production which determines the stop design of a middle decoration design). In the singing reach production, music based on the variable display pattern flows from the speakers 14 and 29 during the singing reach production, and the accompanying production display (for example, lyrics are sequentially displayed according to the music) is displayed on the liquid crystal display. At 50.

  Note that “Song Reach” is different for “Song Reach A” with variable numbers 5 to 8, “Song Reach B” with variable numbers 9 to 12, and “Song Reach C” with variable numbers 13 to 16. The music is categorized as a reach production set. In addition, each of “Song Reach” has a longer production period than “Song Reach (first half)” of variation numbers 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14 and “Song Reach (first half)”. Are classified into “song reach (second half)” of the variation numbers 7, 8, 11, 12, 15, and 16. For each “Song Reach”, a part of the music set in “Song Reach (second half)” is set to “Song Reach (first half)”, and in “Song Reach (first half)” While only the first half of the song is played, "Song Reach (second half)" plays from the first half to the second half of the song.

  The variation number 17 of “full rotation reach” is a jackpot finalizing effect in which the normal reach effect is not executed, and the decorative symbol that is a combination of the jackpot symbol is changed synchronously, and either the probable big hit symbol or the non-probable big hit symbol is selected. It is a variable display pattern for executing a full rotation reach effect that stops and displays with one jackpot symbol.

  In addition, the variation number 18 “Tasuto 10 Premium” displays the “Tasuto 10” symbol as a temporary stop symbol for a decorative symbol (for example, up and down (or may be left and right). After performing the “Tatsuto 10” effect, which is not completely stopped by shaking in small increments, the movable body 124 is operated by controlling the movable body drive motor 126 to operate temporarily. This is a variable display pattern in which a probabilistic big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol during a period in which the decorative symbol that has been stopped is covered with the movable body 124 and is difficult to visually recognize. Note that the “plus 10” symbol is the sum of the numerical values of the number symbols drawn on all the decorative symbols without forming the reach form with the left and right decorative symbols, like the variation display pattern of variation number 1. It is a combination of symbols that becomes “10”. The variation number 18 is a variation display pattern that is executed only when the winning result is a probable big hit.

  The “normal reach” and “single reach” of the variation numbers 19 to 32 are variation display patterns that involve slip variation and execute the reach effect similar to each of the variation display patterns of the variation numbers 3 to 16. . The slip variation changes as if the decorative design (in this embodiment, the right decorative design) for determining whether or not to form the reach mode is stopped and displayed once in a design that does not become the reach mode. (Temporary stop display) is a mode in which another symbol is displayed again after stopping. For example, when each decorative symbol is sequentially switched and displayed in a variable display of decorative symbols, after temporarily displaying a decorative symbol for determining whether or not a reach mode is to be formed with a symbol that is not a reach mode Further, it may be a mode in which the decorative symbols are switched again and stopped display, or when each decorative symbol is scrolled and displayed in the variation display of the decoration symbols, it is determined whether or not a reach mode is formed. After changing the decorative pattern for high speed fluctuation from low speed fluctuation, the decorative design is framed by a few frames and temporarily stopped with a design that does not become the reach mode. It may be an aspect in which stop display is performed after shifting to low speed fluctuation.

  Here, although details will be described later, even in the processing of the integrated CPU 212 mounted on the sub-integrated board 211, the variation display pattern accompanied by the slip variation of the variation numbers 19 to 32 is also displayed before the slip variation is executed. It is determined at a rate of 1/2 that the “10” effect will be executed. When the “Tasuto 10” effect is executed for a variation display pattern with slip variation, the “Tasto 10” design is first temporarily stopped as the “Tasuto 10” effect, and then the reach mode is displayed. The decoration symbol for determining whether or not to form the image is variably displayed again, and the display is stopped and displayed with the symbol forming the reach mode. In this case, when the “Tasuto 10” effect is executed, the player can grasp that the slip change is executed, and the “Tasto 10” effect gives the player the execution of the slip change. It will be an announcement made in advance.

  In this embodiment, the “Tasuto 10 Premium” effect is executed on the basis of the fluctuation display pattern of “Tasuto 10 Premium” of the fluctuation number 18 and the “Tasato 10 Premium” effect is executed based on the fluctuation display pattern accompanied by slip fluctuations. There are cases where the “10” effect is executed, and after the “Tasuto 10” design is displayed, it is determined whether the “movable body 124 is activated” or not. And 10 ”cannot be determined. Thus, when the decorative symbol is “tentatively 10” and the temporary stop display is performed, it can be noted whether or not the probable big hit symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed without going through the reach mode, It is possible to have a sense of expectation in the production after the “Tasuto 10” production.

  In addition, in the decorative symbol variation display executed on the liquid crystal display 50, the player pays attention to whether or not the player is in the reach mode. And when it becomes a reach mode, it pays attention to whether it becomes a big hit symbol, so it can enhance the expectation for the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, when the reach mode is not achieved, the expectation for the big hit gaming state is lowered, and there is a possibility that the user may not be interested in the change display. In this embodiment, since the “tass and 10” symbols out of the reach symbols different from the reach mode and the jackpot symbol are used as the temporary stop symbols of the decorative designs, even when the reach mode is not achieved, “tass and 10” is also achieved. It can be noticed whether or not it will be a symbol, and the expectation can be given to the end with respect to the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variation number 33 “normal reach at short hit per change” and the “normal reach at small hit” at the variation number 34 are the normal reach effect with the reach mode in the same manner as the variation display pattern of the “normal reach” of the variation numbers 3 and 4. Is executed, but as a decorative symbol stop symbol (in this embodiment, a medium ornament symbol) after the reach form is formed, the chance effect inrush symbol is stopped and displayed without stopping the numerical symbol in the variable display. This is a variable display pattern. The variation number 33 “normal reach at short hit per normal change” and the variation number 34 “normal reach at small hit” are the variation displays used when it is determined to control to the probability variable short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, respectively. This is a pattern, and after the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the chance effect entry symbol based on the variation display pattern, a probability variation short hit game state or a small hit game state is generated, respectively.

  In normal reach production, after the reach form is formed, the decoration design that has not been stopped yet is displayed to determine whether it will be a big hit design (combination of the same decorative design) or whether it will develop into a super reach production. (In this embodiment, the player pays attention to the medium decoration symbol). However, since the rate at which the jackpot symbol is derived and the rate at which it develops to the super reach production is not so high, the expectation for the big hit gaming state is lowered, and the player is not interested in the fluctuation display in the normal reach production. There is a fear. In this embodiment, the chance display rush symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal reach production, and the expectation for the “probable short hit game state” and the “small hit game state” is increased, thereby making the fluctuation display in the normal reach production monotonous. It is restrained that the interest of a game falls.

  In this embodiment, the same effect is produced from the normal fluctuation to the normal reach production in the normal reach production until the chance production inrush symbol is stopped and displayed on the fluctuation number 33 “normal reach at the time of probability change short” and the fluctuation number 34 “normal reach at the time of short hit”. Whether the “probability short hit gaming state” or “small hit gaming state” is to be generated is determined even if the result mode is displayed only by looking at the presentation mode that is set and displayed on the liquid crystal display 50 I can't. Then, regardless of whether the “probability short hit game state” or the “small hit game state” is generated, the chance effect rush display is stopped and displayed as a decorative design stop pattern, and then the chance effect rush display is controlled. . When the chance effect entry symbol based on the “variable probability short hit normal reach” of the variation number 34 is stopped and displayed, the probability effect entry display is controlled to the probability variation short hit gaming state and then the probability change state is controlled. Also, when the chance effect entry symbol based on the “small reach normal reach” of the variation number 35 is stopped and displayed, the game is controlled to the normal state after the chance effect entry display is controlled to the small hit gaming state. In this way, even if the player grasps the stop display of the chance effect inrush symbol, the probability variation short hit game state and the small hit game state are set substantially the same, so the probability variation state or normal state from the next variation display It is impossible to determine which gaming state of the state, and the expectation for the probability variation state can be maintained after the next variation display. In other words, even if there is no change in the game state (even if the normal state is continued), the game can be continued while the expectation for the probability variation state is maintained, and the decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed. doing.

  In addition, when the variation number 33 “normal reach at short hit per change” and the “normal reach at small hit” at the variation number 34 are executed, a chance effect in which the probability variation state and the normal state are mixed from the next variation display. Executed. In the chance effect, the display of the background image (chance effect background) for the chance effect is performed while executing the variable display pattern set in the variable display pattern table. When the display pattern is executed, display control is performed for either the normal chance effect background or the special chance effect background from the next variation display. When the variation display pattern of variation number 34 “normal reach at small hit” is executed, the display of the special chance effect background is not performed from the next variation display, and the display control of the normal chance effect is always performed. As a result, when the display of the normal chance effect background is performed, it cannot be determined whether the current gaming state is the probability variation state or the normal state, and the expectation for the probability variation state is maintained. Can do. In addition, when the display of the special chance effect background is controlled, it can be known that the gaming state, which is difficult to discriminate in the variation display in which the “normal reach at the probability variation short hit” of the variation number 33 is executed, is the probability variation state. Thus, useful information for the player can be obtained.

  Each variation display pattern is set with a special symbol variation time (the time from when the special symbol variation display is started by the special symbol display LED 144a until the special symbol variation display is stopped). Yes. The variation time of the special symbol is set to substantially coincide with the variation time of the decorative symbol designated by the variation display pattern command transmitted to the sub-integrated board 211. In step S415, the variation corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol is set. The variation display pattern having the symbol variation time is determined. In other words, the variation time of the special symbol and the variation time of the decorative symbol do not have to completely coincide.

  In addition, each variation display pattern is set to have a long variation time for special symbols and decorative symbols as the execution time of the representation becomes longer as the reach effect is executed more after the reach mode. Specifically, the variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is “song reach” as the super reach effect after the normal reach effect is executed, rather than the change display pattern (for example, change numbers 3 and 4) in which only the normal reach effect is executed. The variation display pattern to be executed (for example, variation numbers 5 to 16) is set longer. Furthermore, in the variable display pattern for executing “Song Reach”, the variable display pattern for executing “Song Reach (first half)” (for example, change numbers 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14) is “ The variation display pattern (for example, variation numbers 7, 8, 11, 12, 15, 16) for executing “song reach (second half)” is set longer by the execution time corresponding to the second half of the music.

  Further, the variation display patterns of the variation numbers 19 to 32 are slipping variations, and even if the variation display patterns are executed in the same reach effect as the variation display patterns of the variation numbers 3 to 16 that do not involve the slip variation. The variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is set long for the time when the variation is executed. This means that if there is a slip variation, it will likely be stopped at the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped when there is no slip variation. This is because the stop display of the decorative symbol is delayed only for the time of.

  Further, in the variation display patterns of variation numbers 3 to 16 and 19 to 32, the reach effect is executed in the same or similar effect manner at the time of the big hit and the time of losing according to the result of the winning, and according to the reach effect. Since the variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol are set to be almost the same, it is difficult to recognize the success / failure only by looking at the production, which can make the player throbbing and reduce the interest of the game Absent.

  In this embodiment, in the probability variation big hit fluctuation display pattern table and the non-probability big hit fluctuation display pattern table selected in steps S411a and S411b, the winning result of the fluctuation display patterns of the fluctuation numbers 3 to 32 is the big hit. The fluctuation display patterns (fluctuation display patterns marked with a circle in the fluctuation display pattern table shown in FIG. 18) are set, and determination values are assigned to these fluctuation display patterns. However, the fluctuation display pattern of “Tatsuto 10 Premium” with the fluctuation number 18 is not set in the fluctuation display pattern table for the non-probable big hit, and the fluctuation display of the fluctuation number 18 is made in the fluctuation display pattern table for the probable big hit. Fluctuation display patterns other than the number of determination values assigned to the patterns (in this embodiment, a variation display pattern in which the winning result is a big hit among the variation display patterns of variation numbers 3 to 17 that do not involve slip variation. ) Are assigned many judgment values.

  In addition, the reach variation display pattern table selected in step S413 includes a variation display pattern in which the winning result is out of the variation display patterns of the variation numbers 3 to 32 (the variation display pattern table shown in FIG. Variation display patterns marked with x) are set, and determination values are assigned to these variation display patterns. In addition, in the fluctuation display pattern table for normal state out of the fluctuation display pattern table at the time of loss selected in step S414, the determination value is the fluctuation display pattern of “normal fluctuation” with the fluctuation number 1 in which the result of the win is lost. In the deviation display pattern table for probability variation / short time state, the judgment value is distributed to the variation display pattern of “shortened variation” of variation number 2 in which the winning result is out of order. It should be noted that the deviation variation display pattern table for the probability variation / shortening state is the jackpot determination random number extracted based on the detection by the start switch 68a, 70a even in the normal state where the shortening control is not executed. This can be selected when a condition such as an upper limit value is established for the value of the reserved ball number counter indicating the stored number.

  In addition, each variation display pattern table (probability large hit variation display pattern table, non-probability large hit variation display pattern table, reach variation variation display pattern table, reference variation variation display when the game state is in the probability variation state and the short time state. The pattern table) and each variation display pattern table referred to in the normal state are composed of different variation display pattern tables. In each variation display pattern table referred to in the probability variation state and the short time state, the determination value is hardly allocated to the variation display patterns of the variation numbers 19 to 32 accompanied by the slip variation. In the probability variation state and the short time state, the short time state is performed and the winning probability to the lower start port 70 is increased. However, when the variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol becomes long, the number of held balls for which variation display is not yet executed. However, there is a risk that the player will temporarily stop the game because the number of reserved balls becomes the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). Accordingly, the number of reserved balls is digested by reducing the selection probability of the variation display patterns of the variation numbers 19 to 32 in which the variation times of the special symbol and the decoration symbol are set long and increasing the number of variation displays per unit time. The waiting time can be suppressed.

  In addition, the probability variation big hit fluctuation display pattern table referred to in the probability variation state and the short time state has a variation number of 18 “Tasuto 10 Premium” than the probability variation big hit fluctuation display pattern table referred to in the normal state. A very large number of judgment values are assigned to the fluctuation display pattern, and in the probability fluctuation state, when the probability variation is a big hit, the rate at which the variation number 18 “Tasuto 10 Premium” is executed is very high. . On the other hand, as described above, each of the variation display pattern tables referred to in the normal state has the variation numbers 19 to 32 accompanied by the slip variation more than each variation display pattern table referred to in the probability variation state and the short time state. A very large number of judgment values are assigned to the variation display pattern, and in a normal state, the rate at which slip variation is executed is very high. For the variation display pattern of “Tasuto 10 Premium” with the variation number 18 and the variation display patterns of the variation numbers 19 to 32 accompanied by the slip variation, the “Tasuto 10” symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Add 10 ”effect. For this reason, when the “plus 10” effect is executed in the probability variation state, either the “plus 10 premium” with the variation number 18 or the slip variation with the variation numbers 19 to 32 is performed. However, when the probability variation is a probable big hit in the probability variation state, the percentage of “Tasuto 10 Premium” with the variation number 18 is high, so the “Tasuto 10” production is performed. When executed, the expectation that a probable big hit is derived can be increased.

  In addition, in the big hit time fluctuation display pattern table and the reach deviation time fluctuation display pattern table, the big hit expectation degree (the ratio of the big hit in the ratio (total appearance rate) in which the hit effect is executed (total appearance rate)) Appearance rate at the time); expectation value of jackpot = appearance rate at the time of jackpot / total appearance rate) is different for each variable display pattern. Specifically, the variable display pattern that executes the super reach effect is set to have a higher expectation of jackpot than the variable display pattern that executes only the normal reach effect, and “Song Reach” is executed as the super reach effect. Among the variable display patterns to be executed, the variable display pattern that executes “Song Reach (second half)” is set to have a higher jackpot expectation than the variable display pattern that executes “Song Reach (first half)”. Yes. In the variation display pattern for executing “Song Reach (first half)”, “Song Reach B (first half)” of variation numbers 5, 6, 21, 22 and “Song Reach B” of variation numbers 9, 10, 25, and 26 are used. (First half) ”, and“ Song Reach C (first half) ”of variation numbers 13, 14, 29, and 30 are set so that the degree of expectation for jackpots increases. In the variation display pattern for executing “Song Reach (second half)”, “Song Reach A (second half)” with variation numbers 7, 8, 23, and 24, and “Song Reach B” with variation numbers 11, 12, 27, and 28. (Last half) "," Song reach C (second half) "of the variation numbers 15, 16, 31, 32 is set in order of the big hit expectation.

  In addition, in the big hit time fluctuation display pattern table and the reach deviation time fluctuation display pattern table, the judgment value is distributed to each fluctuation display pattern so that the big hit expectation degree differs depending on the presence or absence of slip fluctuation. Specifically, the expectation degree of big hit is a variation display pattern (variation display pattern of variation numbers 19 to 32) accompanied by a slip variation rather than a variation display pattern (variation display pattern of variation numbers 3 to 16) not accompanied by a slip variation. Is set to be slightly higher. For the variation display patterns of variation numbers 19 to 32 accompanied by the slip variation, the “tatto 10” effect is displayed to temporarily display the “tatto 10” symbol. For this reason, when the “plus 10” effect is executed, even if the “plus 10 premium” with the variation number 18 from which the probability variation big hit is derived is not executed, the big hit expectation degree is slightly higher. Since the slip fluctuations of Nos. 19 to 32 are executed, it is possible to increase the expectation that a big hit is derived when the “plus 10” effect is executed.

  In addition, the fluctuation display pattern of the fluctuation number 34 “normal reach at the probability variation short hit” is set in the fluctuation display pattern table of the probability variation short hit, while the fluctuation display pattern table of the fluctuation number 35 “ A variation display pattern of “normal reach at the time of small hits” is set, and all determination values are assigned to these variation display patterns. In addition, the variation display patterns of the variation numbers 34 and 35 are not set in the respective variation display pattern tables at the time of probability variation big hit, non-probability variation big hit, reach, and off, and the determination values are not distributed. That is, when the winning result is out of place, the chance effect is not started without stopping the chance effect entry symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, in the fluctuation display after the fluctuation number 33 “normal reach at short hit per change” and the “normal reach at small hit” at the fluctuation number 34 are executed, the fluctuation display pattern of the “normal reach at probability short hit” of the fluctuation number 34 is displayed. Even if it is executed and controlled to the probability variation state, the variation display pattern is selected from each variation display pattern table referenced in the normal state. In this embodiment, since it is difficult to discriminate from the normal state after the small hit gaming state based on the “small hit”, unlike the probability variation state after the positive variable big hit gaming state based on the “probable big hit”, the “probable change” Short-time control is not executed in the probability variation state after the probabilistic short hit gaming state based on “short hit”. As a result, the winning probability to the lower start port 70 does not increase, so there is no need to increase the number of times of fluctuation display per unit time, and the fluctuation display pattern is selected from each fluctuation display pattern table referred to in the normal state. Yes.

  Following step S417 of the variation display pattern setting process, the CPU 202 checks whether or not the big hit flag and the probability variation status flag are set (step S418). A probability variation jackpot command, which is an effect command indicating that there is, is set (step S419). Then, the process selection flag is updated to “2” (step S420). Note that the probability variation jackpot command set in step S419 is transmitted to the sub integrated board 211 in the command transmission output process (step S19) together with the variation display pattern command. As a result, the integrated CPU 212 mounted on the sub-integrated board 211 can recognize that it is a probable big hit as a result of the current fluctuation display.

  In the variable display pattern setting process, a plurality of types of winning commands are set in addition to the probability variation jackpot command as an effect command indicating the winning result. Specifically, when the big hit flag is set but the probability variation status flag is reset, the winning command indicating the non-probable variation big hit is the non-probable big hit command and the probability variation short hit flag is set when the probability variation short hit flag is set. If the winning command that shows a short hit and the small hit flag are set, the small hit command that indicates a small hit, and the big hit flag, the probable short hit flag, and the small hit flag are not set. In some cases, a process for setting a miss command as a winning command indicating a miss is executed. The integrated CPU 212 mounted on the sub-integrated board 211 is any one of probability variation big hit, non-probable variation big hit, probability variation short hit, small hit, and loss as a result of the current variation display by the winning command transmitted together with the variation display pattern command Can be recognized. In this embodiment, the variable display pattern command also includes information indicating the winning result, and the integrated CPU 212 determines whether or not the winning results indicated by the variable display pattern command and the winning command match. ing. This makes it possible for the integrated CPU 212 to reliably recognize the result of the present fluctuation display, and to prevent malfunction such as failure to receive a command due to the influence of external noise or the like, and displaying an incorrect fluctuation display result. Can do.

  Also, in the variation display pattern setting process, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is set as an effect command indicating the gaming state, and the gaming state is the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is set. A process for setting a game state command indicating that the game state is in a short time state when the time state flag is set is executed. The gaming state command is transmitted to the sub integrated board 211 in the command transmission output process (step S19) together with the change display pattern command and the winning command. The integrated CPU 212 mounted on the sub-integrated board 211 can recognize that the gaming state is in the probability changing state by the gaming state command indicating the probability changing state, and the gaming state is in the time saving state by indicating the time shortening state. I can recognize that.

  The effective period timer set with the variation time in step S417 starts when the variation display pattern command is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 211 in the command transmission output processing (step S19), and in the variation processing (step S42). When the effective period timer times out, the special symbol display LED 144a outputs a drive signal to cause the CPU 202 to stop the special symbol variation display, and also causes the sub-integrated board 211 to command the decorative symbol variation display stop (variation) Stop command). The sub-integrated board 211 performs control for confirming and displaying the stop of the decorative symbol based on the reception of the change stop command.

  In addition, when a plurality of display areas are provided on the display device and symbols are displayed in a variable manner in each display area, the display is stopped at a specific display result when the big hit determination process is performed. When there are multiple display lines to be displayed, when a symbol that has not been stopped on any display line stops at a predetermined symbol, the symbol that is stopped and displayed on the display line becomes a specific display result. Alternatively, a state in which all the symbols are synchronously displayed in a combination such that a specific display result is obtained on any one of the display lines is referred to as a reach mode. In other words, the reach mode is a mode (a mode immediately before a big hit) representing a step before a specific display result (big hit display). In this embodiment, there is only one display line as described above, and among the left, middle and right decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display 50, the left decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol, and two arbitrary decorative symbols. May be stopped) with the same symbol, and the medium decorative symbol (the remaining decorative symbol when the combination of two arbitrary decorative symbols is stopped) is variably displayed, or the liquid crystal display 50 All the decorative symbols displayed on the screen are displayed in a synchronized manner with the same symbol combination (for example, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a synchronized manner so that they always have the same design. State) is called a reach mode, and after reaching the reach mode, the frame lamp 27, the center LED substrates 102, 104, 106, 108, 110, 112, 114, 116, the side LED substrate 130, and the liquid crystal display 50, effects performed by the upper speaker 29, the lower speaker 14, and the like (for example, the frame lamp 27, the center LED substrates 102, 104, 106, 108, 110, 112, 114, 116, and the side LED substrate 130 are arranged in a predetermined manner. Lit / blink, predetermined image display on the liquid crystal display 50, and predetermined audio output on the upper speaker 29 and the lower speaker 14) are called reach effects.

  Further, the hit-related control command will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 (A) and 19 (B). In the jackpot gaming state command table shown in FIG. 19 (A), an effect command for designating a predetermined effect display on the liquid crystal display 50 when controlling to the jackpot gaming state is set, and the probability change shown in FIG. 19 (B). The short hit game state and small hit game state command table includes an effect command for designating a predetermined effect display on the liquid crystal display 50 when controlling to the probable short hit game state or the small hit game state. An effect command for designating output in a predetermined sound output mode is set.

  In the jackpot game state command table, as shown in FIG. 19A, a jackpot start command, a jackpot round start command, a jackpot round end command, a jackpot end command, and a jackpot winning prize detection command are set. The big hit start command is an effect command for designating an effect display for starting the big hit gaming state, and “20H” is set as the first byte of the effect command. The big hit round start command is an effect command for designating an effect display indicating the number of rounds in a predetermined number of rounds, and “22H” is set as the first byte of the effect command. The jackpot round start command is set with a jackpot round start command corresponding to rounds 1 to 15 because the number of rounds at the jackpot is 15 rounds.

  The big hit round end command is a command for designating an effect display in an interval period from the end of the round to the start of the next round, and “22H” is set as the first byte of the effect command. The jackpot end command is an effect command for designating an effect display at the end of the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot (end of the jackpot gaming state), and “23H” is set as the first byte of the effect command. The winning prize winning detection command is an effect command for designating the effect display of the number of winnings when a game ball is won at the winning prize opening, and “24H” is set as the first byte of the effect command. The The sub-integrated board 211 displays the effects designated for each effect command on the liquid crystal display 50 based on the reception of the effect commands set in the jackpot gaming state command table, Let the player recognize the contents of the specified performance.

  In this embodiment, as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, whether the probability variation jackpot symbol (the same odd symbol) or the non-probability variation jackpot symbol (the same even symbol) is stopped and displayed, or the variation display after the jackpot gaming state By performing the effect display of “probably changing” or “short in time” on the liquid crystal display 50, it is notified whether the gaming state after the big hit gaming state becomes a probability variation state or a normal state (short time state). However, it may be notified by displaying the effect at the end of the big hit gaming state. In this case, the jackpot end command is different depending on whether the game is controlled in the probable big hit game state or in the case of being controlled in the non-probable big hit game state, and the game state after the big hit game state is notified together with the end of the number of rounds in the big hit. The effect display may be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, the probability variation short hit gaming state and small hit gaming state command table includes a short hit start command, a short hit open / close start command, a short hit open / close end command, a short hit end command, A winning mouth winning detection command is set. The short hit start command is an effect command for designating the start of the effect display of the chance effect entry (chance effect entry display), and “20H” is set as the first byte of the effect command. The short hit opening / closing start command is an effect command for designating sound output, and “22H” is set as the first byte of the effect command. Since the number of times of opening and closing at the time of the probable short hit and the small hit is 2, only the short hit opening / closing start command corresponding to the first and second times is set. Here, since the number of times of opening and closing at the time of short hit is two times unlike the number of rounds at the time of big hit, the short hit opening and closing start command corresponding to 3 to 15 rounds is not set.

  The short hit opening / closing end command is a command for designating the stop of sound output started by the short hit opening / closing start command, and “22H” is set as the first byte of the effect command. The sub-integrated board 211 receives the sound output set for each effect command based on the reception of the effect command specifying the sound output set in the probability variation short hit game state and the small hit game state command table. Output from the lower speaker 14. Here, the sound output mode output from the lower speaker 14 is a volume at which the player cannot hear in a noisy game store, and the sound output specified in the production command is not noticed by the player. Yes. In this embodiment, a simple beep sound is output as the sound output mode, but a different sound output mode may be used corresponding to each effect command.

  The short hit end command is an effect command for designating the end of the chance effect entry display started by the short hit start command, and “23H” is set as the first byte of the effect command. The big prize opening detection command is the same production command as the big prize opening detection command set in the big hit gaming state command table, and “24H” is set as the first byte of the production command.

  FIG. 19C shows an example of the number of times of opening / closing the big winning opening and the opening time table in each gaming state. When the gaming state is the big hit gaming state, the number of times of opening / closing the big prize opening is set to 15 times, and the opening time of the big prize opening per time is set to 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the gaming state is a probable short win game state or a small hit game state, the number of times of opening / closing of the big prize opening is significantly smaller than that in the big hit gaming state, and the number of the big prize opening per time is two times. The opening time is set to 0.3 seconds, which is significantly shorter than that in the big hit gaming state. However, in the small hit gaming state, the second opening is not executed when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won by the first opening of the big winning opening 72.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the winning game start process (step S43). In the winning game start process, according to the result of the winning determination process (step S43), that is, if the big hit flag is set, the process for starting the big hit gaming state is executed, and the probability change short hit flag or the small hit flag If the flag is set, a process for starting the probability variation short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed.

  Specifically, in the winning game start process, the CPU 202 sets a start command according to the set flag (step S451). That is, if the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot gaming state command table is selected, and the jackpot start command set in the jackpot gaming state command table is set as the start command. On the other hand, if the probability variable short hit flag or the small hit flag is set, the probability variable short hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state command table are selected, and the probability changing short hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state command table are set. Set the short hit start command. The set big hit start command and short hit start command are transmitted to the sub-integrated board 211 in the command transmission output process (step S19) described above.

  Next, the CPU 202 sets the open / close count corresponding to the set flag in the open / close count counter (step S452). That is, if the big hit flag is set, the big winning opening / closing count table to be referred to in the big hit gaming state is selected, and “15 times” is set as the open / close count set in the big winning opening / closing count table. Set to counter. On the other hand, if the probable short hit flag or the small hit flag is set, the big winning opening / closing count table to be referred to in the probable short hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state is selected and set in the big winning opening / closing count table. “2 times” is set in the open / close counter as the open / close frequency.

  Further, the CPU 202 sets a release time corresponding to the set flag in the release timer (step S453). That is, if the big hit flag is set, the release time table to be referred to in the big hit gaming state is selected, and “30 seconds” is set in the release timer as the release time set in the release time table. On the other hand, if the probability variable short hit flag or the small hit flag is set, the release time table to be referred to in the probability variable short hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state is selected, and the opening time set in the opening time table is selected. Set “0.3 seconds” to the release timer. The set release timer is subtracted in the interrupt process.

  Then, a special winning opening release flag is set (step S454). When the special winning opening release flag is set, the special winning combination game (step S18) controls the solenoid 73a to move the open / close member 72a to open, thereby opening the special winning opening. Control. Therefore, after setting the special winning opening opening flag, the open / close counter is decremented by 1 (step S455). Further, when the winning game start process is ended, the process selection flag is updated to “4”. Thereby, it will be in the state which can perform the process (step S44) in a hit game by the next interruption process.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the hit game processing (step S44). In the winning game process, a process for controlling the opening / closing of the special winning opening is executed in accordance with the setting contents of the winning start process.

  Specifically, when the hit flag (big hit flag, probability variation short hit flag or small hit flag) is set (step S460), the CPU 202 sets the standby time if the standby flag is set (step S461). It is determined whether or not the timer has timed out (step S462). If the standby time timer has timed out, the standby flag is reset (step S463), and the release time according to the flag is set in the release timer (step S463). S464). The standby flag is a flag indicating that the game is waiting until it is controlled to open again after the special winning opening is closed. The standby time timer is a state after the special winning opening is closed. This is a timer indicating the waiting time until control is again made into the open state. When the standby flag is set, if the standby time timer times out, processing is performed to open the special winning opening. That is, if the big hit flag is set, the release time table to be referred to in the big hit gaming state is selected, and “30 seconds” is set in the release timer as the release time set in the release time table. On the other hand, if the probability variable short hit flag or the small hit flag is set, an opening time table to be referred to in the probability variable short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is selected, and the opening time set in the opening time table is selected. Set “0.3 seconds” to the release timer.

  Next, if the release timer has not timed out (step S463), it is determined whether or not a game ball win is detected at the big winning opening (step S468). If there is a game ball win detection, the number of wins detected is determined. A big prize opening detection command is set (step S469). That is, when it is determined in the switch input process (step S11) that a game ball is detected by the count switch 72a, a special winning opening detection command corresponding to the number of detected game balls is set. The big prize opening detection command is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 211 in the command transmission output process (step S19), and the integrated CPU 212 mounted on the sub-integrated board 211 has received the number of prizes corresponding to the big prize opening detection command. The liquid crystal display 50 executes an effect display for notifying that.

  In the big hit gaming state, when “10” gaming balls are detected as a predetermined number by the count switch 72a in one round from the control of the big winning opening to the open state to the closed state. Even if “30 seconds” as the predetermined period has not elapsed, the special winning opening is controlled to be closed. That is, in the switch input process (step S11), when “10” game balls are detected when the big hit flag is set, the release timer is cleared (“0”). By clearing the opening timer, it is determined that the opening timer has timed out in step S465 of the winning game process, and a process for controlling the special winning opening to the closed state is executed.

  On the other hand, in the promiscuous short hit game state and the small hit game state, in the big hit game state, the count switch 72a sets the predetermined number by one opening / closing from controlling the big winning opening to the closed state. Even when “0.3 seconds” as a predetermined period has not elapsed when “10” game balls are detected, the special winning opening is controlled to be closed. That is, in the switch input process (step S11), when “10” gaming balls are detected when the probability variation short hit flag or the small hit flag is set, the release timer is cleared (“0”). . By clearing the opening timer, it is determined that the opening timer has timed out in step S465 of the winning game process, and a process for controlling the special winning opening to the closed state is executed. If “10” game balls are detected while the small hit flag is set, the open / close counter is also cleared (“0”). By clearing the opening / closing number counter, it is determined that the opening / closing number counter is 0 in step S470 of the hitting game process, and a process for ending the small hit gaming state is executed. In the promising short win game state and the small hit game state, the big winning opening is controlled to the open state only for “0.3 seconds” which is much shorter than the “30 seconds” opened in the big hit game state. A predetermined number of game balls are rarely won at the big prize opening, and the number of game balls won at the big prize opening is smaller than in the big hit gaming state.

  On the other hand, if the open timer has timed out in step S465, a round (open / close) end command corresponding to the flag is set (step S466). That is, if the big hit flag is set, the big hit round end command of the big hit gaming state command table is set, and if the probability variable short hit flag or the small hit flag is set, the probability variable short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state Set the short hit open / close end command in the command table. Then, a special winning opening blockage flag is set (step S467). When the special winning opening blockage flag is set, the special winning combination game (step S18) controls the solenoid 73a so that the open / close member 72a is closed, thereby closing the special winning opening. Control.

  If the open / close counter is not 0 (step S470), the open / close counter is decremented by 1 (step S471), the standby time is set in the standby time timer (step S472), and the standby flag is set (step S471). S473), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the open / close counter is 0 (step S470), the hit flag (big hit flag, probability variation short hit flag and small hit flag) is reset (step S474), and an end command corresponding to the flag is set (step S475). ). That is, if the big hit flag is set, the big hit end command of the big hit gaming state command table is set, and if the probable short hit flag or the small hit flag is set, the probable short hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state command Sets the table short hit end command.

  Then, an effect end wait timer is set (step S476). The effect end waiting timer is a timer indicating a time until an effect (for example, a big hit end display, a chance effect inrush display, etc.) executed on the liquid crystal display 50 ends. In the subsequent winning game process, NO is determined in step S460, and a process of determining whether or not the effect end waiting timer has timed out is executed (step S477). If the production end wait timer has timed out in step S477, the process selection flag is updated to “0” and the process is terminated (step S478). By updating the process selection flag to “0”, the change start process (step S40) can be executed in the next interrupt process.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the processing for the case of executing the big hit gaming state and the case of executing the probability variation short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state are made common. That is, although the table to be selected varies depending on the set flag, the processing to be executed is substantially the same. Therefore, it is possible to execute the big hit gaming state, the probability changing short hit gaming state, and the small hit gaming state without adding a program relating to control of the probability changing short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, which is mounted on the main control board 201. The amount of data stored in the ROM 203 can be reduced.

  In addition, the effect command is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 211 in the command transmission output process (step S19) described above. However, the big hit gaming state is executed by changing the table to be selected depending on the set flag. The execution commands transmitted in the case of executing the probability variation short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state are different. In this way, by changing the production command according to the type of the hit game state, the sub-integrated board 211 recognizes whether the game state is a big hit game state, a probable short hit game state, or a small hit open / close short game state. Thus, different effect displays can be executed when the big hit gaming state is executed and when the probability variation short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect according to the value given by the winning game state, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Here, in either case of executing the probability variation short hit gaming state or the case of executing the small hit gaming state, by selecting the probability variation short hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state command table, , Common production commands are used. In this way, the same effect display and sound output are executed by using the common effect command in the case of executing the probability variation short hit game state and the case of executing the small hit game state, and any game state It is difficult to determine whether it is. In either case of executing the probability variation short hit gaming state or the case of executing the small hit gaming state, the common variable selected from the probability variation short hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state command table is used. Although the effect command is used, it is only necessary to execute the same effect display that makes it difficult to determine the game state on the effect display 50. For example, a probable short hit game state command table and a small hit game state command table are provided separately. Different production commands set in each command table may be used.

  When the jackpot gaming state is executed, an effect command for designating a predetermined effect display on the liquid crystal display 50 is selected from the jackpot gaming state command table. For example, the start of the jackpot gaming state by the jackpot start command is selected. Like the effect display, the player is clearly notified of the start and execution of the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, when the probability change short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed, together with the effect command for designating a predetermined effect display on the liquid crystal display 50 from the probability change short hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state command table, An effect command that designates an output of a predetermined sound output mode is selected by the lower speaker 14. For example, a game is displayed by a chance effect entry display that a chance effect is executed when the short hit start command is changed from the next time. Unlike the big hit gaming state, the player is not clearly notified of the start or execution of the probable short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Here, when the player grasps the execution of the probable short hit game state or the small hit game state, it is difficult to win the game ball in the big winning opening 72 in the probable short hit game state or the small hit game state. In addition, since it is unlikely that many game balls can be obtained, the impression is lost as compared to the big hit game state. In this embodiment, when the probability variation short hit gaming state or the small hit opening / closing short gaming state is executed, display control of an effect display for notifying the start or execution of the probability variation short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is performed. In addition, by controlling the display of the chance effect entry display or controlling the output of the low-pitched sound output mode by the lower speaker 14, execution of the probability variation short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state (specifically, the condition operating device Execution of the opening / closing control of the player) is less likely to be noticed by the player.

  Next, processing executed by the integrated CPU 212 mounted on the sub integrated substrate 211 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-main processing, and FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms steady processing.

  As shown in FIG. 22, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the integrated CPU 212 performs an initial setting process (step S71). In the initial setting process, a process of clearing the integrated RAM 214 mounted on the sub integrated board 211 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S71) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S72).

  In this embodiment, the integrated CPU 212 generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms elapses. While the flag T is set, a 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S72 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S73), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S74).

  In this 16 ms steady process, the liquid crystal display 50, the frame lamp 27, the center LED boards 102, 104, 106, 108, 110, 112, 114, 116, and the side LED board 130 based on the effect command received from the main control board 201. Then, processing for controlling the speakers 14, 29, etc. is executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S72 again, and every time the 16 ms elapse flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms, the above steps S73 to S74 are repeated. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S72 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the integrated CPU 212 executes the processes of steps S91 to S95. In the command analysis process of step S91, the effect command received from the main control board 201 is analyzed. In the remote control signal reception process of step S91a, a control process related to the effect display device 50 is executed based on the operation signal received from the remote control 90. In the effect control process of step S92, a control process related to the liquid crystal display 50 is executed based on the variable display pattern command. Specifically, a notice effect to be described later is set, a decorative symbol stop symbol is determined, and the like.

  Moreover, in the sound control process of step S93, the control process regarding the speakers 14 and 29 is performed. In the lamp control process in step S94, control processes related to the center LED boards 102, 104, 106, 108, 110, 112, 114, 116, the side LED board 130, and the frame lamp 27 are executed. In the information output process in step S95, a display command is transmitted to the display control board 220, and a drive signal and a lamp lighting signal are transmitted to the lamp drive board 156. In the random number update process of step S96, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S92) is executed.

  Here, various random numbers updated by the integrated CPU 212 mounted on the sub-integrated board 211 in the above-described random number update process (step S96) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, the probability variation big hit symbol used for determining the probability variation big hit symbol as the decorative symbol stop symbol, and the non-probability big hit symbol used for the determination of the non-probable big hit symbol as the decorative symbol stop symbol. Random symbol used as a symbol random symbol, stop symbol for decorative symbol, random symbol used for determination of symbol, “Tass 10” execution determination random number used for determination of whether or not to execute “Tasuto 10” effect, “Ta When the “10” effect is executed, the “Tasuto 10” symbol random number used to determine the “Tasuto 10” symbol as a temporary stop symbol of the decorative symbol, a determination as to whether or not to switch the background image (for example, Background determination random number used to determine whether to shift from the normal background to the next seasonal background or special background, or whether to shift from the special background to the normal background and end the special background) Hit And a chance effect determination random number used for determination related to the chance effect executed at the time of a small hit (for example, determination of whether or not to execute a special chance effect as a chance effect, determination of whether or not to end the chance effect), Etc. Various random numbers (probable big hit symbol random number, non-probable big hit symbol random number, outlier symbol random number, “plus 10” execution decision random number, “plus ten” symbol random number, background decision random number, chance effect decision random number, etc.) Is acquired when the effect command received from the main control board 201 in the command analysis process (step S91) is a variable display pattern.

  In addition, the processes in steps S91 to S96 in the 16 ms steady process are completed within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is started from the beginning immediately after the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (step S91 described later). Do not execute) That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S72 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S96) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 ms steady process.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing (step S91). In the command analysis process, the integrated CPU 212 first determines whether or not an effect command has been received from the main control board 201 (step S601). In this embodiment, when an effect command is received from the main control board 201, other processes such as a 16 ms steady process are interrupted to generate a command reception interrupt process, and the received command is mounted on the sub-integrated board 211. Are stored in the received command storage area in the integrated RAM 214. The reception command storage area is provided with a plurality of areas corresponding to the reception order of the production commands, and in the command reception interrupt process, the reception command storage areas are stored in the respective areas corresponding to the reception order of the production commands. In step S601, the contents of the received command storage area are confirmed. If the received command is stored, the effect command in the order of reception in the received command storage area is read (step S602).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (step S603). If the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (YES in step S603), a variable display pattern reception flag is set. Then, it is stored in the variable display pattern storage area in the integrated RAM 214 mounted on the sub-integrated board 211 (step S604). When the read effect command is a variation display pattern command, various random numbers (probable variation big hit symbol random number, non-probable variation big hit symbol random number, outlier symbol random number, “assum 10” updated in the random number update process (step S96). An execution determination random number, “plus 10” design random number, background determination random number, chance effect determination random number, etc.) are acquired and stored in a predetermined storage area of the integrated RAM 214.

  On the other hand, if the read effect command is not a variation display pattern command (NO in step S603), it is determined whether the read effect command is a probability change jackpot command (step S605), and if the read effect command is a probability change jackpot command. If (YES in step S605), a probability variation jackpot flag is set (step S606). If the read production command is not a probability change big hit command (NO in step S605), the received production command (a winning command other than the probability change big hit command (non-probability big hit command, probability variable short hit command, small hit command)), game A flag corresponding to a status command, a change stop command, a big hit start command, etc.) is set (step S607).

  Note that the probability variation jackpot flag and the non-probability variation jackpot flag (flag corresponding to the non-probability variation jackpot command) are reset when the jackpot gaming state is started in a hit display process (step S702) described later. In addition, the probability variable short hit flag (flag corresponding to the probability variable short hit command) and the small hit flag (flag corresponding to the small hit command) are also displayed in the winning display process (step S702), respectively, in the probability variable short hit gaming state or the small hit game. Reset when starting a state. Further, the timing when these hit flags are reset is not limited to this. For example, when the decorative symbol variation display (step S701) described later is stopped, specifically, a variation stop command is received. It may be reset when the game is performed, or may be reset when each winning game state is ended in the winning display process (step S702).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of remote control signal reception processing (step S91a). In the remote control signal reception process, the integrated CPU 212 first determines whether or not an operation signal has been received from the remote control 90 (step S651). In this embodiment, when the receiving unit 90a detects an operation signal transmitted from the remote controller 90, the detection signal is input to the sub-integrated board 211, and other processing such as 16 ms steady processing is interrupted to detect the reception of the detection signal. A process is generated, and a flag indicating reception of a detection signal is set in a detection signal storage area in the integrated RAM 214 mounted on the sub-integrated board 211. In step S651, it is determined whether or not a flag indicating reception of the detection signal is set in the detection signal storage area. If the flag indicating reception of the detection signal is set (YES in step S651), the detection signal is stored. Is reset, and the processing of steps S652 to S658 is executed. If the flag indicating reception of the detection signal is not set (NO in step S651), it is determined that no operation signal has been received from remote controller 90, and the process ends.

  If an operation signal has been received from remote controller 90 (YES in step S651), it is determined whether the background forced flag is set (step S652). If the background forced flag is not set (NO in step S652), the background forced flag is set (step S653), and a display command corresponding to the ON operation of remote controller 90 is set (step S654). Then, it is determined whether or not the special background execution flag is set (step S655). If the special background execution flag is set (YES in step S655), the special background execution flag is reset (step S656). The background forced flag is a flag different from the special background execution flag, and the special background is controlled to be displayed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 30 times) from the next variable display, or the predetermined number of times. If the result of the variable display during the period is a positive or short win or small hit, it is a flag indicating that it is clarified which hit was made in the subsequent chance effect. The set / reset state (ON state / OFF state) of the background forced flag is stored in the integrated RAM 214.

  If the background forced flag is set (YES in step S652), the background forced flag is reset (step S657), and a display command corresponding to the OFF operation of remote controller 90 is set (step S658). The display command set in steps S654 and S658 is transmitted to the display control board 220 in the information output process (step S95), and the display CPU 221 mounted on the display control board 220 turns the display command on the remote controller 90. If the command is a response command, the liquid crystal display 50 controls display of an effect display indicating that the remote control 90 is turned ON. If the command is a command corresponding to the OFF operation of the remote control 90, the liquid crystal display 50 controls the remote control. An effect display indicating that 90 is turned on is controlled to be hidden. By configuring in this way, the remote control 90 uses the effect display 50 to determine whether or not the receiving unit 90a has correctly received the operation signal from the remote control 90 when the ON / OFF operation button of the remote control 90 is operated. This can be confirmed by whether or not an effect display indicating that the ON operation has been performed is displayed. In this embodiment, an effect display indicating that the remote controller 90 has been turned on is displayed on the liquid crystal display 50, but it is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not the remote controller 90 has been turned on. It may be a lamp or LED attached at a position where it can be visually recognized by the manager (or player) of the game hall such as the board 4 or the rendering device 400.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S92). In the effect control process, the integrated CPU 212 refers to the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress state of the game and performs any one of steps S700 to S702.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S700) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, a setting for starting the decorative symbol variation display is performed if a variation display pattern command is received. Specifically, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined according to the variable display pattern command and the probability variation jackpot command, the notice effect is set, and the process selection flag is updated to “1”.

  In the decorative symbol variation process (step S701) executed when the process selection flag is “1”, when a variation stop command is received, a display command is transmitted to the display control board 220 to stop the decorative symbol variation display. If control is performed and the big hit start command or short hit start command is received from the main control board 201, the processing selection flag is updated to “2”, and the big hit start command and the short hit start command are received from the main control board 201. If not, the process selection flag is updated to “0”.

  In the hit display process (step S702) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, if the big hit start command is received from the main control board 201, a display indicating the start of the big hit gaming state is displayed on the liquid crystal display 50. And performing control for displaying a big hit game state (for example, round display etc.) in response to a big hit game command transmitted from the main control board 201, and receiving a big hit end command, the big hit game The end of the state is displayed and the process selection flag is updated to “0”. If a short hit start command is received from the main control board 201, control for starting the chance effect rush display is executed on the liquid crystal display 50, and if a short hit end command is received, the chance effect rush display is performed. And the process selection flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S700). In the decorative symbol variation start process, the integrated CPU 212 first determines whether or not the variation display pattern reception flag is set (step S710). The variation display pattern reception flag is a flag that is set in step S604 of the command analysis process (step S91) described above and indicates that a variation display pattern command has been received from the main control board 201. That is, if the variable display pattern reception flag is not set in step S710 (NO in step S710), it is determined that a variable display pattern command has not been received, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the variable display pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S710), the variable display pattern reception flag is reset (step S711), and the processing from step S712 to step S719 is executed. In the “plus 10” setting process of step S712, a process of setting the “plus 10” symbol as a temporary stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the determination of whether to execute the “plus 10” effect. Run. In the symbol setting process in step S713, a process of setting a decorative symbol stop symbol based on the received winning command (and the variation display pattern command) is executed. In the notice selection process in step S714, a process for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect and determining the type of the notice effect is executed. In the background selection processing in step S715, processing for determining the type of background image (normal background season or special background) is executed. In the remote control signal reception end setting process in step S716, the number of times of change display after the background forced flag is set is monitored, and the process of resetting the background forced flag is executed when the predetermined number of times is reached. In the chance effect setting process of step S717, a process of determining the type of chance effect (normal chance effect or special chance effect) when the received winning command (and the variable display pattern command) is a probable short hit or small hit command. Run.

  Next, the integrated CPU 212 executes a notice selection process (step S717) for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect and determining the type of the notice effect (step S717), and then the background image type (normal background season or special background). The background selection process (step S717a) is performed to determine the change display pattern, the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area described later, and the decoration symbols determined in steps S755, S758, S759, and S760. A display command corresponding to the symbol is set (step S718). Then, the process selection flag is updated to “1” and the process ends (step S719). The display command set in step S718 is transmitted to the display control board 220 in the information output process (step S95), and based on the display command being received by the display CPU 221 mounted on the display control board 220. The execution of the variable display of the decorative symbols is started on the liquid crystal display 50. When the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area is read in step S718, the contents of the notice type storage area are cleared after reading the notice pattern. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the notice effect of the notice pattern determined when the change display of the previous decoration symbol is erroneously started in the next decoration pattern change display from being executed.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the “case 10” setting process (step S712) executed in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S700). In the “plus 10” setting process, the integrated CPU 212 first determines whether or not the variation display pattern based on the received variation display pattern command is “plus 10 premium” with the variation number 18 (step S851). ). If it is the fluctuation display pattern of the change number 18 “plus 10 premium” (YES in step S851), the “plus 10” symbol table (see FIG. 30) at the time of common is selected (step S852). Then, the judgment value set in the “plus 10” symbol table at the time of the probable big hit matches the “plus 10” symbol random number obtained in the command analysis process (step S91). And 10 "symbols (step S853).

  On the other hand, if the variable display pattern is not “10 to 10 premium” with the variable number 18 in step S851 (NO in step S851), the variable display pattern is a pattern with slip variation (variable display of variation numbers 19 to 32). It is determined whether or not it is a (pattern) (step S854). If the variation display pattern is a pattern with slip variation (YES in step S854), a “assuming 10” execution determination table (not shown) is selected (step S855). Then, whether or not the determination value set in the “task 10” execution determination table matches the value of the “task 10” execution determination random number acquired in the command analysis process (step S91). It is determined whether or not to execute the “plus 10” effect (step S855; “plus 10” execution determination), and to execute the “plus 10” effect based on the match. decide. In addition, in the “assault 10” execution determination table, the number of determination values for executing the “assault 10” effect among the two “assault 10” execution determination random numbers from 0 to 1 is one. The ratio of executing the “plus 10” effect is set to ½.

  In this embodiment, the case where the slip variation is simply executed based on the variation display pattern accompanied by the slip variation of the variation numbers 19 to 32, and “assuming 10” is determined by the execution determination of “assuming 10” in step S855. There is a case where the slip variation is executed after temporarily displaying the “Tatsuto 10” symbol when it is decided to execute the effect. By configuring in this way, slip variation is executed by developing a plurality of types of variation display, and the process of deriving the reach mode can be varied, and the game can be made interesting.

  Next, when the integrated CPU 212 determines in step S855 that “assass 10” production is to be executed by the “assass 10” execution determination (YES in step S856), the received winning command indicates a win. It is determined whether it is a command, and it is determined whether the variation display pattern based on the received variation display pattern command is a variation display pattern that generates a big hit (whether it is a hit pattern) (step S857). Whether or not the pattern is a hit pattern can be confirmed by referring to the second byte data of the variable display pattern command.

  If the winning command is not a command indicating a win (NO in step S857), the symbol table “10” (see FIG. 30A) is selected at the time of common (step S858). If the winning command is a command indicating a win (YES in step S857), it is determined whether the probability variation big hit flag is set (step S859). If the probability variation big hit flag is set (YES in step S859). ), The probability variation big hit “assault 10” symbol table (see FIG. 30A) is selected (step S860).

  On the other hand, if the probability variation big hit flag is not set in step S859 (NO in step S859), the symbol table (see FIG. 30 (A)) at the time of non-probable big hit is selected (step S861). Then, in the probability variation big hit “plus 10” symbol table selected in steps S858, S861, and S862, in the non-probable big hit “plus 10” symbol table, or in the common “plus 10” symbol table. The “plus 10” symbol that matches the set determination value and the value of the “plus 10” symbol random number acquired in the command analysis process (step S91) is determined as a temporary stop symbol (step S862). ).

  FIG. 30A shows the “plus 10” symbol table at the probability variation big hit, the “plus 10” symbol table at the non-probable big hit, and the “plus 10” symbol table at the common time. In these “plus 10” symbol tables, 30 types of “plus 10” symbol numbers 1 to 30 are prepared as “plus 10” symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30 (A), the reach pattern is not formed by the left and right decorative symbols, and the sum of the numerical values of the numerical symbols drawn on all the decorative symbols is “10”. A combination (“plus 10” symbol) is set.

  The symbol table 10 for “probable big hit” is a pattern with a slip of fluctuation numbers 19 to 32 and when a winning command indicating a probable big hit is received, This is a table for determining the “plus 10” symbol based on the “plus 10” symbol random number in step S862 when it is decided to execute the “ten plus” effect. In addition, in the “Tasuto 10” symbol table at the probable big hit, the number symbol drawn on the left decorative symbol is an odd symbol (in this embodiment, “one”, “three”, “five”, “seven”). The values of “plus 10” design random numbers are distributed almost evenly to 17 types of “plus 10” symbol numbers 1 to 6, 13 to 17, 22 to 25, 29, and 30. This is because when the symbol table 10 is selected at the probability variation jackpot, the probability variation jackpot symbol (a combination of the same odd number symbols) is stopped and displayed based on the winning command indicating the probability variation jackpot. In other words, when the “Tasuto 10” effect is performed in which the number symbol drawn on the left decorative symbol becomes an odd symbol, the right decorative symbol fluctuates and is stopped and displayed with the same odd symbol as the left decorative symbol. After the reach form is formed, the middle decorative symbol is also displayed with the odd number of the same symbol as the left decorative symbol in the reach effect, so that it becomes a probable big hit symbol. Is done.

  In addition, the symbol table 10 for the non-probable big hit is when the winning command indicating the non-probable big hit is received when the pattern table has a slip pattern with the fluctuation numbers 19 to 32, and the “plus 10” is executed. This table is used to determine the “plus 10” symbol based on the “plus 10” symbol random number in step S862 when it is decided to execute the “plus 10” effect. In addition, in the “Tass 10” symbol table at the non-probable big hit, the number symbol drawn on the left decorative symbol becomes an even symbol (in this embodiment, “two”, “four”, “six”). The values of “plus 10” symbol random numbers are distributed almost evenly to 13 types of symbol numbers 7-12, 18-21, 26-28. This is because, when the symbol table “Tatsuto 10” at the time of non-probable variation is selected, the non-probability large-hit symbol (combination of the same even number of symbols) is stopped and displayed based on the winning command indicating the non-probable variation big hit. In other words, when the “Tasuto 10” effect is performed in which the number symbol drawn on the left decorative symbol is an even symbol, the right decorative symbol is slipped and displayed in a stopped manner at the same even symbol as the left decorative symbol. After the reach form is formed, the middle decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with the same even symbol as the left decorative symbol in the reach production, resulting in a non-probable big hit symbol. Is derived.

  In addition, the symbol table 10 for common use is a pattern with slips of variation numbers 19 to 32 when a variation display pattern command corresponding to variation number 18 of “plus 10 premium” is received. In addition, when the winning command indicating the deviation is received, the table is for determining the “plus 10” symbol based on the “plus 10” symbol random number in step S862. In addition, in the common “Tasuto 10” symbol table, the number symbol drawn on the left decorative symbol may be either an odd symbol or an even symbol. The “10” symbol random number values are distributed substantially evenly. This is because, when the symbol table 10 is selected at the same time, the symbol table 10 is added to the symbol 10 based on the variable display pattern command corresponding to the variable number 18 “plus 10 premium”. This is because the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, or the lost symbol is stopped and displayed based on the winning command indicating the loss. In other words, when the “plus 10” effect is executed when the variation display pattern command corresponding to “plus 10 premium” with the variation number 18 is received, the movable body drive unit motor 126 is driven and controlled. The movable body 124 is actuated, and the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed during a period when the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is covered with the movable body 124 and is difficult to visually recognize. As a result of the current variation display, the probability variation big hit is derived. In addition, when the “Tatsuto 10” effect is executed when a winning command indicating a loss is received, the right decorative symbol slides and is stopped and displayed with the same even symbol as the left decorative symbol. However, when the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the left decorative symbol in the reach effect, the symbol is shifted, and the shift is derived as a result of the current variation display.

  In this embodiment, when the “plus 10” effect is executed, the probability variation big hit symbol is derived based on the variation display pattern of “plus 10 premium” with the variation number 18, and the variation number 19 There are cases where slip variation is executed based on a variation display pattern with slip variation of ~ 32 and a reach mode is derived. With this configuration, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed with the symbol “Tatsuto 10”, at least the reach mode is derived. The expectation for the big hit gaming state can be increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, the “plus 10” symbol table for the probability variation big hit, the “plus 10” symbol table for the non-probable big hit, the “plus 10” symbol table set in the common case “10 and 10” symbol numbers are distributed almost evenly to the symbol numbers, but “ass and 10” symbol numbers may not be equally distributed. In addition, the value of “plus 10” design random numbers may be distributed so that the ratios for deriving the number symbols of the left decorative symbols are substantially equal. For example, in the symbol table 10 for “probable big hit”, “plus 10” for 17 types of symbol numbers 1 to 6, 13 to 17, 22 to 25, 29, 30 If the design random numbers are distributed almost evenly, the percentage of the left decorative design that determines the number design as “1” increases, and as a result, the probability that the probability variation big win symbol is derived as “1” increases. End up. However, the number symbol of the left decorative symbol is “1”, “Tasu 10” symbol numbers 1 to 6, “Three” is “Tass 10” symbol numbers 13 to 17, and “T” is “T”. "10" symbol numbers 22 to 25, "7" "Tasuto 10" symbol numbers 29 and 30 so that the percentages for deriving the respective numerical symbols are substantially uniform. By distributing the random numbers, it is possible to eliminate the bias in the combination of numerical symbols derived as probability variation big hit symbols.

  Further, in this embodiment, “plus 10” symbol table at probability variation big hit, “plus 10” symbol table at non-probability big hit, “plus 10” from common “plus 10” symbol table. Although the symbol is determined, the method of determining the symbol “10” is not limited to this. For example, first, only the numerical symbol of the left decorative symbol is determined based on the winning command (for example, a winning command indicating a probable big hit) If it is an odd symbol, and if it is a winning command indicating a non-probable big hit, the even symbol is determined), and then the “Tass 10” symbol including the numeric symbol of the determined left decorative symbol is determined. Good.

  Note that a re-lottery pattern for executing a re-lottery effect may be set as a variable display pattern in the probability variation big-hit fluctuation display pattern table or the non-probability big-hit fluctuation display pattern table. The redrawing effect is a temporary stop display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display 50 (temporary stop symbols) (the variation display of the decorative symbols has not yet stopped, For example, after the vertical and vertical (or right and left) may be swayed in small increments and the decorative symbols are not completely stopped), the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are again displayed in a variable manner. This is an effect of confirming and displaying a big-hit symbol that is temporarily stopped or a big-hit symbol that is different from the temporarily-hit big-hit symbol after repeated times. In the redrawing effect, the special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is not stopped and displayed until the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. In the re-lottery effect, another lottery (determination of whether or not to make a promising big hit) is not actually made, but after the big win symbol is displayed as if it was stopped and displayed, is the big hit symbol changed? It is an effect of no, when a big hit symbol different from the big hit symbol that is displayed as if it was once stopped is displayed as a stop symbol (determined symbol), and a big hit symbol that is displayed as if it was temporarily stopped May be stopped and displayed as a stop symbol (determined symbol). Then, in the case where the “Tatsuto 10” effect is executed on the re-lottery pattern with slip variation, the winning command, that is, whether the stop symbol (determined symbol) is a probability variable big hit symbol or an uncertain variable big hit symbol. Instead of determining the “plus 10” symbol, the “plus 10” symbol is determined based on whether the jackpot symbol to be temporarily displayed is the probability variation big hit symbol or the non-probable variation big hit symbol.

  Further, in this embodiment, as the “plus 10” symbol, the reach pattern is not formed by the left and right decorative symbols, and the sum of the numerical values of the numerical symbols drawn on all the decorative symbols is “10”. A combination of symbols is set. In addition, seven types of numeric symbols “1” to “7” are used for the decorative symbols. By configuring in this way, “plus 10” symbols are set for all the numerical symbols of the left decorative symbol, and among the decorative symbols, the left decorative symbol that is first stopped and displayed is the highest value. Even if all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, there is a possibility that the sum of the numerical symbols will be “10”. Even after the left decorative symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped), It can be noticed whether or not it will be the “plus 10” symbol, and a sense of expectation can be given to the end of the variation display of the decorative symbol. In addition, while the total number of numerical symbols is “10”, the maximum value of the numerical symbol is “seven”. However, it is preferable that the maximum value of the numerical symbol is a small value. The total is “10” so that it can be easily calculated. In addition, by calculating the sum of the numerical symbols in the order in which each decorative symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped), not only the visual interest for the decorative symbol variation display but also the player's thinking ability I'm working on it. In addition, the sum of the numerical value of a number symbol may be anything as long as it does not require a high level of calculation ability.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the symbol setting process (step S712) executed in the decorative symbol variation display process (step S700). In the symbol setting process, the integrated CPU 212 first determines whether the received winning command is a command indicating a win, and whether the variable display pattern based on the received variable display pattern command is a variable display pattern that generates a hit ( Whether the pattern is a hit pattern) is determined (step S751). Whether or not the pattern is a hit pattern can be confirmed by referring to the second byte data of the variable display pattern command.

  If the winning command is not a command indicating a win (NO in step S751), the stop symbol of the off symbol is determined (step S752). Next, it is determined whether or not the “assass 10” effect is executed in the “assass 10” setting process (step S712) (step S753), and it is decided to execute the “assass 10” effect. If not (NO in step S753), the “plus 10” symbol table (see FIG. 30A) is selected. Then, based on whether or not the “plus 10” symbol set in the “plus 10” symbol table matches the stop symbol of the missed symbol determined in step S752, the missing symbols are replaced. Or not (step S754; “Tass 10” replacement determination), and based on the match, the symbol is changed from “Tat 10” to “Tat 10” symbol table (FIG. 30 ( (B) (see step S755). As described above, by executing steps S753 to S755, the symbol “Tatsuto 10” is not stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the missed symbol.

  Here, the symbol to be replaced in step S755 is the symbol “Tatsuto 10” symbol replacement which is the same number as the symbol “Tasuto 10” symbol number of the symbols matched in the “Tassato 10” replacement determination. It is determined that the number is an off symbol (for example, if “ass and 10” symbol number 1 is “ass and symbol 10” symbol replacement number 1 is an off symbol). Note that FIG. 30 (B) shows the “plus 10” symbol replacement table. 30 types of “plus 10” symbol replacement numbers 1-30 corresponding to each of “plus 10” symbol numbers 1-30 are prepared in the “plus 10” symbol replacement table. Yes. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), 1 is added to the numeric symbol value of the medium decoration symbol among the “plus 10” symbols set to the “plus 10” symbol numbers 1 to 30. The combination of the symbols (however, “1” if “seven”) is set.

  On the other hand, if the winning command is a command indicating a win (YES in step S751), whether the probability variable short hit flag or the small hit flag is set (a command indicating a probable short hit or a small hit among the hit indicating commands). It is determined (step S756). If the probable short hit flag or the small hit flag is set (YES in step S756), the left of the left, middle and right decorative symbols as the decorative symbol stop symbol (probable short hit symbol or small hit symbol) Then, the right decorative symbol is the same symbol, and the decorative symbol in the middle is determined to be a combination of symbols that is a chance effect rush symbol different from the numeric symbol (step S760).

  If the probability variation short hit flag or the small hit flag is not set in step S756 (NO in step S756), it is determined whether the probability variation big hit flag is set (whether it is a command indicating a positive probability big hit out of the commands indicating a hit). If the probability variation jackpot flag is set (YES in step S757), the stop symbol of the probability variation jackpot symbol is determined (step S758). If the probability variation big hit flag is not set in step S757 (NO in step S757), the stop symbol of the non-probable big hit symbol is determined (step S759).

  In this embodiment, a combination symbol is determined as a stop symbol out of a combination of odd numbers (specific symbols) that are the same odd symbol (specific symbol) as a probable variation jackpot symbol of a decorative symbol, and the same even symbol as a non-probable variable jackpot symbol of a decorative symbol One of the combinations of (non-specific symbols) is determined as a stop symbol. In step S752, when the stop symbol of the shift symbol is determined, it is determined whether it is a variable display pattern with a reach mode. The left and right decorative symbols are the same among the right decorative symbols, and the middle decorative symbol is determined as a stop symbol that is different from the left and right decorative symbols. On the other hand, in the case of a variable display pattern that does not involve a reach mode, a stop symbol in which each of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is a different symbol is determined as the decorative symbol loss symbol. The above-mentioned probability variation big hit symbol, non-probability big hit symbol, and outlier symbol stop symbol are the probability variation big hit symbol random number and non-probable big hit symbol obtained in the command analysis process (step S91) when the “assum 10” effect is not executed. On the other hand, the symbol random number or the off symbol random number is used to determine the combination of symbols based on the left decoration symbol of the “plus 10” symbol when the “plus 10” effect is executed.

  Here, in the case where the “tatto 10” effect is executed for the variation display pattern accompanied by the slip variation of the variation numbers 19 to 32, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at step S862 of the “tasting 10” setting process. In addition to determining the symbol “Tasu 10” as a symbol, the symbol setting processing steps S755, S758, and S759 determine the combination of symbols based on the left decorative symbol of the “Tass 10” symbol as a decorative symbol stop symbol. . Specifically, when the “plus 10” symbol is determined from the “plus 10” symbol table at the probable big hit, a combination of odd symbols identical to the left decorative symbol of the “plus 10” symbol in step S758. When it is determined that the stop symbol is (probable big hit symbol) and the “plus 10” symbol is determined from the “plus 10” symbol table at the non-probable big hit symbol, the right of the “plus 10” symbol is determined in step S759. When a stop symbol that is a combination of even symbols (non-probable big hit symbol) that is the same as the decorative symbol is determined, and “Tass 10” symbol is determined from the “Tass and 10” symbol table at the time of common use, “ The left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol of the “10 plus” symbol are the same, and the middle decorative symbol is determined to be a different stop symbol.

  On the other hand, when the “plus 10” effect is executed for the variation display pattern “plus 10 premium” with the variation number 18, the decorative symbol temporary is set in step S853 of the “plus 10” setting process. As a stop symbol, the symbol “toss 10” is determined, and in step S758 of the symbol setting process, a specific odd symbol (this) In the embodiment, it is determined as a combination of “seven”) (probability big hit symbol).

  32 to 34 are flowcharts showing an example of the background selection process (step S715) executed in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S700). In the background selection process, the integrated CPU 212 first determines whether a chance effect execution flag is set (step S801). If the chance effect execution flag is set (YES in step S801), the process proceeds to step S833. The chance effect execution flag is a small hit normal chance effect execution flag, a probable variable short hit normal chance effect execution flag, and a probable variable short hit special when set in steps S892, S898, and S899 of a chance effect setting process described later. This is a general term for a chance effect execution flag, and is a flag indicating that the chance effect is executed until the end condition of the chance effect is satisfied. The set / reset state (ON / OFF state) of each chance effect execution flag is stored in the integrated RAM 214.

  If the chance effect execution flag is not set in step S801 (NO in step S801), it is determined whether time reduction control is being executed (step S802). Note that the time-shortening control is executed in the probability variation state after the big hit gaming state based on the “probable big hit” and the “non-probable big hit” or in the time-short state, but after the promising short hit gaming state based on the “probable short hit” It is not executed in the normal state after the small hit gaming state based on the probability variation state or the “small hit”. Whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state or a short time state after the big hit gaming state is determined by a probability display state or a short time in the fluctuation display after receiving the probability variation big hit command or the non-probability variable big hit command from the main control board 201. A game state command indicating a state is received and can be confirmed by a flag corresponding to the game state command indicating the probability variation state or the short time state set in step S607 of the command analysis process (step S91). If the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short time state after the big hit gaming state (YES in step S802), it is determined whether the background flag is a flag indicating display control of the spring background (step S803), and the background flag is spring. If it is not a flag indicating background display control (NO in step S803), the background flag is updated (set) to a flag indicating spring background display control (step S804). Note that the background flag is a flag indicating that display control is performed using a normal background of a spring background, a summer background, an autumn background, or a winter background as a background image in accordance with the value of the background flag. Further, the value of the background flag is stored in the integrated RAM 214.

  Then, the display command corresponding to the background flag indicating the display control of the spring background is set, and the process is terminated (step S805). The display command set in step S805 is transmitted to the display control board 220 in the information output process (step S95), and based on the display command received by the display CPU 221 mounted on the display control board 220. The liquid crystal display 50 controls the display of the spring background as a background image at least during a normal variation period from the start of the decorative symbol variation display to whether or not the reach mode is formed.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the display is controlled by switching the normal background in the order of the spring background → summer background → autumn background → winter background seasonal background. By changing (setting) the background flag to a flag indicating the display control of the spring background when transitioning to the probability variation state or short-time state after the big hit gaming state, the background flag is displayed in the probability fluctuation state or short-time state after the big hit gaming state. Display control is performed by fixing an image to a spring background, which is one of the normal backgrounds. Even if the special background is controlled to be displayed as the background image before the transition to the probability variation state or the short-time state after the big hit gaming state, step S830 is performed based on the fact that the variation display pattern is a winning pattern in step S824 described later. By resetting the special background execution flag, the display is controlled by returning the background image to the normal background (spring background) after the transition to the probability variation state or the short time state after the big hit gaming state. Then, after the end of the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state or the short time state, the background image is started from the spring background (however, in the first variation display after the end of the probability variation state after the big hit gaming state or the short time state) Unless the normal background transition condition or special background start condition is met). After the game state is shifted to the probability variation state or the short time state after the big hit gaming state (YES in step S802), steps S806 to S842 described later are not executed, and the normal background transition condition or special background Since the start condition is not satisfied, the background flag indicating the display control of the spring background is not updated.

  In step S802, if the gaming state is not the probability variation state or the short time state after the big hit gaming state (NO in step S802), it is determined whether the special background execution flag or the background forced flag is set (step S806). If the special background execution flag or the background forced flag is set (YES in step S806), the process proceeds to step S822. The special background execution flag is set in step S820, which will be described later, and indicates that the special background is continuously displayed as a background image until the special background end condition is satisfied. The set / reset state (ON / OFF state) of the special background execution flag is stored in the integrated RAM 214.

  If the special background execution flag and the background forced flag are not set in step S806 (NO in step S806), it is determined whether or not the normal background effect display according to the background flag is the upper limit number (step S807). If the upper limit number has been reached (YES in step S807), the process proceeds to step S818. Whether or not the effect display of the normal background according to the background flag is the upper limit number is set in the counter when the background flag is updated (set) in step S818 to be described later, and the background flag is set in step S819. This is determined by referring to the number counter which subtracts 1 each time a display command corresponding to is set. That is, when the number counter becomes 0, it is determined that the normal background effect display corresponding to the background flag is the upper limit number of times. In addition, the upper limit number of display effects of the normal background varies depending on the background flag, and the background flag indicating the display control of the spring background, the summer background, and the winter background is 50 times, whereas the display control of the autumn background is indicated. The background flag is set to 20 times.

  Next, the integrated CPU 211 determines whether or not the fluctuation display pattern is a “normal fluctuation” of fluctuation number 1 or a winning pattern among the fluctuation numbers 3 to 34 (step S808). In step S808, YES), reference is made to the hit time of the background transition determination table (see FIGS. 35A to 35D) according to the background flag (step S809). Then, the process proceeds to step S815. Whether or not the variation display pattern is a hit pattern can be confirmed by referring to the second byte data of the received variation display pattern command.

  If the variable display pattern is not a winning pattern in step S808 (NO in step S808), it is determined whether or not the variable display pattern is a reach pattern (variable display pattern with a reach mode) (step S810). Whether or not the variation display pattern is a reach pattern can be confirmed by referring to the second byte data of the received variation display pattern command. That is, if the second byte of the variable display pattern command is not “01H” or “02H”, it is a reach pattern. If the variable display pattern is not the reach pattern (NO in step S810), the normal shift time of the background transition determination table (see FIGS. 35A to 35D) corresponding to the background flag is referred to (step S811).

  If the variable display pattern is a reach pattern in step S810 (YES in step S810), the variable display pattern that executes only the normal reach effect among the reach patterns (in this embodiment, the change numbers 3, 4, 19, 20) (step S812). Whether or not the display pattern is a variable display pattern that executes only the normal reach effect can be confirmed by referring to the second byte data of the received variable display pattern command. That is, if the second byte of the variable display pattern command is “03H”, “04H”, “13H”, or “14H”, it is a variable display pattern that executes only the normal reach effect. If the display pattern is a variable display pattern that executes only the normal reach effect (YES in step S812), the normal reach deviation time in the background transition determination table (see FIGS. 35A to 35D) corresponding to the background flag is referenced (step S813) If the display pattern is a variable display pattern that executes not only the normal reach effect but also the super reach effect (NO in step S812), the background transition determination table corresponding to the background flag (see FIGS. 35A to 35D). Reference is made to the time when the super reach is lost (step S814).

  The determination value set in the background transition determination table (any of hit time, normal shift, normal reach shift, and super reach shift) according to the background flag referenced in steps S809, S811, S813, and S814. Then, based on whether or not the background determination random number acquired in the command analysis process (step S91) matches, it is determined whether or not to transfer the background image from the normal background to the next seasonal background or special background (step S815). ; Background transition judgment).

  Next, when determining that the background image is to be transferred by the background shift determination in step S815 (YES in step S816), the integrated CPU 212 matches the determination value at which the background determination random number shifts to the special background in the background shift determination. Then, it is determined whether or not the background image is determined to be transferred from the normal background to the special background (step S817). If the background determination random number matches the determination value for shifting from the normal background to the next seasonal background and the background image is determined to shift from the normal background to the next seasonal background (NO in step S817). ), The background flag indicating the display control of the next seasonal background is updated (set) (step S818). Also, when the normal background effect display according to the background flag reaches the upper limit number in step S807, the background flag indicating the next seasonal background display control is updated (set) in step S818. If it is determined in the background shift determination that the background image is not shifted from the normal background to the special background (NO in step S816 or NO in step S817), whether or not the background flag is updated in step S818. Regardless, a display command corresponding to the background flag is set (step S819).

  If it is determined in step S817 that the background image is to be transferred from the normal background to the special background (YES in step S817), a special background execution flag is set (step S820), and the special background is set. A corresponding display command is set (step S821). The display command set in steps S819 and S821 is transmitted to the display control board 220 in the information output process (step S95), and based on the display CPU 221 mounted on the display control board 220 receiving the display command. In the normal variation period at least from the start of the variation display of the decorative symbols to whether or not the reach mode is formed, the liquid crystal display 50 controls display of a normal background or a special background corresponding to the background flag as a background image. To do. Here, although details will be described later, when the reach mode is formed (when the variable display pattern is a reach pattern), the reach is when the display command corresponding to the special background is received rather than the normal background. Since the timing of forming the mode is delayed, the normal variation period differs between the effect display of the normal background and the special background.

  An example of the background shift determination table is shown in FIGS. 35 (A) to 35 (D). In these background transition determination tables, a spring background transition determination table (FIG. 35A), a summer background transition determination table (FIG. 35B), and an autumn background transition determination table (FIG. 35C) corresponding to the background flag. )), Four types of winter background transition determination tables (FIG. 35 (D) are set. Further, the background transition determination table corresponding to each background flag corresponds to the type of the variable display pattern. Normal time, normal reach time, and super reach time are set.

  The background transition determination table corresponding to the background flag determines whether or not to shift from the normal background to the next seasonal background or special background based on the background determination random number in step S815 every time the decorative symbol variation display is started. It is a table for. In the background transition determination table, determination values are assigned according to whether the transition from the normal background to the next seasonal background or the transition to the special background is performed. 35A to 35D, the background transition determination table (whether it is a hit, a normal deviation, a normal reach deviation, or a super reach deviation) has been assigned to the background transition determination table. The number of is shown.

  In this embodiment, when display control of the normal background is performed as the background image in the previous variation display, the background transition determination determines that the background image is shifted from the normal background to the next seasonal background (in step S816). YES, NO in step S817), display control of the next seasonal background is performed with the current variation display. That is, the normal background transition condition is satisfied when the background transition determination determines that the normal background shifts to the next seasonal background. Each time the transition condition of the normal background is satisfied, the background flag indicating the display control of the next seasonal background is updated (step S818), and the spring background → summer background → Display control is performed by switching the background image in the order of the seasonal background from the autumn background to the winter background.

  Here, in the spring background transition determination table and the winter background transition determination table, as shown in FIGS. 35 (A) and 35 (D), when the reach mode is formed (when the normal reach is off, There are a large number of judgment values assigned to “transition to the summer background” or “transition to the spring background” for the tables referenced at the time of super-reach and hit (in this embodiment). The number of determination values for switching the seasonal background in the table that is usually referred to when the deviation occurs is four, whereas the number of determination values for switching the seasonal background in the table that is referred to when the reach mode is formed is 46). That is, when the display of the spring background and the winter background is controlled as the normal background, the transition condition for the normal background is established at a very high rate when the reach mode is formed. By configuring in this way, in the variable display in which the normal background is shifted from the spring background or the winter background, the ratio of forming the reach mode is high, and the expectation that becomes a big hit after the formation of the reach mode can be increased.

  In the summer background transition determination table, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), among the tables that are referred to when the reach form is formed, the “autumn” table is referred to in the order of the tables that are referred to when the normal reach is lost, when the super reach is lost, and when hit. The number of judgment values assigned to “transition to the background” is large (in this embodiment, the number of judgment values for switching the summer background is 4 in the table referred to when the normal reach is off, whereas the super reach is off. The number of determination values for switching the summer background in the table referred to at the time is 10 and the number of determination values for switching the summer background in the table referenced at the time of hitting is 87). Compared with the spring background shift determination table and the winter background shift determination table, the number of determination values for switching the seasonal background is very small in the table that is referred to when the normal reach is lost or the super reach is lost (when the normal reach or the super reach is reached). Among the referenced tables, the number of judgment values for switching the seasonal background in the summer background transition judgment table is the smallest), while the number of judgment values for switching the seasonal background in the table referenced at the time of hitting is large ( Among the tables that are sometimes referred to, there are the largest number of determination values for switching the seasonal background in the summer background transition determination table). That is, when summer background display control is performed as the normal background, the transition condition of the normal background is not satisfied at a very high rate when deviating after execution of the reach effect, while the big hit is derived A normal background transition condition is satisfied at a high rate. By configuring in this way, in the variable display where the normal background has shifted from the summer background to the autumn background, the ratio of deriving the big hit is high, and particularly when the reach effect is executed, the ratio of deriving the big hit is very high. , Can increase the sense of expectation that will be a big hit.

  Further, in the autumn / background transition determination table, as shown in FIG. 35C, among the tables referred to when the reach form is formed, the table referred to at the time of hitting is more than the table referred to when the normal reach is lost and the super reach is lost. On the other hand, the number of judgment values assigned to “move to the winter background” is extremely small (in this embodiment, the number of judgment values for switching the autumn background in the table that is referred to when normal reach is lost or super reach is lost. (In contrast to 128, the number of judgment values for switching the autumn background in the table referenced at the time of hitting is 2). Compared with the spring background transition determination table and the winter background transition determination table, there are a large number of determination values for switching the seasonal background in the table that is referenced at the time of outage (normally off, normal reach off, super reach off). (Of the tables referenced during normal reach and super reach, there are the largest number of judgment values for switching the seasonal background in the fall / background transition judgment table). The number of values is extremely small (among the tables referenced at the time of hitting, the number of judgment values for switching the seasonal background in the autumn background transition judgment table is the smallest). In other words, when the fall background is controlled as the normal background, the transition condition for the normal background is established at a high rate when the deviation is derived, while the normal background is displayed at a very high rate when the big hit is derived. Transition conditions are not met. By configuring in this way, in the fluctuation display where the normal background has shifted from the autumn background to the winter background, the percentage of deviating is high, and the expectation that becomes a big hit cannot be raised, but the fluctuation that continues the autumn background In the display, the ratio of deriving the big hit is high, and particularly when the reach effect is executed, the ratio of deriving the big hit is very high.

  In this embodiment, when display control of the normal background is performed as the background image in the previous variation display, even when the decision to transfer the background image from the normal background to the next seasonal background is not made by the background shift determination ( If NO in step S816), when the normal background effect display according to the background flag reaches the upper limit number (YES in step S807), display control of the next seasonal background is performed. That is, the normal background transition condition is also satisfied when the normal background effect display according to the background flag reaches the upper limit number of times.

  Here, the transition condition of the normal background is higher than when the normal background effect display according to the background flag reaches the upper limit number of times, and the background image is shifted from the normal background to the next seasonal background by the background shift determination. It is established by making a decision. Specifically, the upper limit number of display effects of the normal background is 50 times according to the background flag indicating the display control of the spring background, summer background and winter background, and 20 times according to the background flag indicating the display control of the autumn background. On the other hand, depending on the background flag indicating the display control of the spring background and the winter background, the average number of times that the effect display of the normal background is continuously executed until the determination to shift to the next background of the normal background is made by the background shift determination 34 times, 37 times according to the background flag indicating the display control of the summer background, and 12 times according to the background flag indicating the display control of the autumn background. As described above, when the transition from the normal background to the next seasonal background is determined by the background transition determination, the transition condition of the normal background is basically satisfied, so that the transition timing of the normal background has randomness. However, it is possible to make the game interesting. In addition, by setting the upper limit number for the effect display of the normal background according to the background flag, the effect display of the same seasonal background can be displayed over a long period of time even when the normal background transfer condition is not satisfied by the background shift determination. It can be prevented from being continued, the effect display of the background image is not made monotonous, and the entertainment of the game is prevented from being lowered.

  In addition, the upper limit number of display effects of the normal background according to the background flag, and the average number of times that the display display of the normal background is continuously executed until the determination of transition from the normal background to the next seasonal background is made by the background shift determination In either case, the number of times that the effect display of the autumn background is continuously executed is the smallest. That is, the transition condition is satisfied at a high rate when the display of the autumn background is controlled in the normal background. By configuring in this way, the rarity of the autumn background effect display is increased, and the expectation such as “What will happen?” Can be enhanced in the variable display in which the autumn background effect display is performed. It is possible to create a sharpness in interest.

  In this embodiment, the autumn background effect display is continuously executed the fewest times. However, when the summer background is controlled as a normal background, the transition of the normal background is performed at a high rate when the big hit is derived. The condition is satisfied, and the display is controlled by shifting to the autumn background. In addition, when the autumn background display control is performed as the normal background, the transition condition of the normal background is not established at a very high rate when the big hit is derived, and the fall background is continuously displayed and controlled. The normal background transition condition is established at a high rate when the image is derived, and the display is controlled by shifting to the winter background. That is, during the display control of the autumn background of the normal background, the jackpot expectation is set higher than the seasonal background different from the autumn background.

  Here, in a gaming machine that sequentially switches and displays a plurality of types of background images, some background images are switched at a high rate when the determination result of the big hit determination is a win. In this case, it is possible to enhance the expectation that is a big hit only by the variable display in which the display control is performed by switching the background image.However, during the display control of each background image, the big hit expectation degree is substantially the same, and There is a risk that the interest in the background image may be lost. In this embodiment, in the variable display that controls the display of the autumn background as the normal background, the ratio of deriving the big hit is high, and the expectation that the big hit can be increased compared to the seasonal background different from the autumn background. It can give a sharpening to the interest of

  In addition, when the summer background is controlled to be displayed as the normal background, the transition condition for the normal background is not established at a very high rate when the deviation is derived after the reach effect is executed, and the summer background is displayed continuously. Control. In addition, when the autumn background display control is performed as the normal background, the transition condition for the normal background is established at a very high rate when the deviation is derived after the reach effect is performed, and the display control is performed by shifting to the winter background. To do. That is, when the reach effect is executed during the display control of the autumn background of the normal background, the big hit expectation is set to be very high compared to the seasonal background different from the autumn background. By configuring in this way, in the variable display that controls the display of the autumn background as the normal background, the ratio of deriving the big hit when the reach effect is executed is very high, compared with a seasonal background that is different from the autumn background. The expectation that will be a big hit can be particularly increased. In addition, when the normal background is switched regardless of the success of the jackpot determination, even if the reach production is executed, the ratio of deviating is high, which is the suspicion of the suspicious demons such as `` or is it out of place? '' By switching the normal background according to the judgment failure, the reach effect on the specific background (in this embodiment, the autumn background) is made to be an effect that can be trusted by the player (an effect with a very high expectation of jackpot) Can do.

  In this embodiment, when the normal background is controlled as the background image in the previous variation display, it is determined by the background shift determination that the background image is shifted from the normal background to the special background (in step S816). YES, YES in step S817), display control of the special background is performed with the current variation display. In the background transition determination table corresponding to the background flag, as shown in FIGS. 35A to 35D, the determination value is assigned to “transition to a special background” with respect to the table that is referred to at the time of normal deviation and hitting. On the other hand, the determination value is not assigned to “move to special background” for the table that is referenced when the normal reach is lost or when the super reach is lost. That is, the start condition of the special background is “normal fluctuation” whose fluctuation display pattern is fluctuation number 1 or a hit pattern among the fluctuation numbers 3 to 17, and the background transition determination determines that the normal background shifts to the special background. It is established when made. It should be noted that in the background transition determination table that is referred to at the time of normal deviation or hit, the number of determination values that shift to the special background is one out of 256 background determination random numbers from 0 to 255, and the normal background changes to the special background. The rate of migration is set to 1/256.

  Here, in the background transition determination table that is referred to at the time of normal deviation or hit, it is assigned to “special background” rather than “continue the normal background” and “transition to the next seasonal background of the normal background”. The number of judgment values is extremely small. That is, when the normal background display control is performed as the background image, even if the fluctuation display pattern is the “normal fluctuation” of the fluctuation number 1 or the hit pattern among the fluctuation numbers 3 to 34, the special display is performed at a very high rate. The background start condition is not met. With this configuration, the rate at which the special background start condition is satisfied is extremely low, and in particular, the expectation such as “What will happen?” Is particularly enhanced in the variable display in which the background image has shifted from the normal background to the special background. It is possible to make the game interesting.

  In this embodiment, the special background start condition may be satisfied when the variation display pattern is “normal variation” of variation number 1 or a hit pattern among variation numbers 3 to 34. The special background start condition is not satisfied when the reach pattern is out of 3 to 34. That is, when the reach mode is formed in the variation display in which the background image has shifted from the normal background to the special background, the reach mode is always formed based on the hit pattern of the variation numbers 3 to 34. As a result of the variation display, A jackpot is derived. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not a big hit is derived only by visually confirming whether or not the reach mode is formed in the variable display in which the background image has shifted from the normal background to the special background. Yes, it is possible to give a player a sense of superiority by knowing that a jackpot is derived before all decorative symbols are stopped (determined).

  In the background selection process (step S715), if the special background execution flag or the background forced flag is set in step S806 (YES in step S806), a display command corresponding to the special background is set (step S822). . Then, it is determined whether or not the background forced flag is set (step S823). If the background forced flag is set (YES in step S823), the process proceeds to step S832. If the background forced flag is not set (NO in step S823), it is determined whether the variable display pattern is a winning pattern among the variable numbers 3 to 34 (step S824), and the variable display pattern is a hit pattern. If not (NO in step S824), it is determined whether or not the special background effect display is the upper limit number of times (25 in this embodiment) (step S825). If the variable display pattern is a winning pattern in step S824 (YES in step S824), or if the special background effect display has reached the upper limit number in step S825 (YES in step S825), the process proceeds to step S830. Transition. Whether or not the special background effect display is the upper limit number of times is determined by setting the upper limit number in the number counter when the special background execution flag is set in the above-described step S820 and displaying according to the special background in step S822. This is determined by referring to the counter of the number of times to subtract 1 every time a command is set. That is, when the number counter reaches 0, it is determined that the special background effect display is the upper limit number.

  If the special background effect display is not the upper limit number in step S825 (NO in step S825), it is determined whether or not the variable display pattern is a reach pattern (variable display patterns with variable numbers 3 to 34 accompanied by a reach mode). (Step S826). Whether or not the variation display pattern is a reach pattern can be confirmed by referring to the second byte data of the variation display pattern command. If the variable display pattern is a reach pattern (YES in step S826), a special background end determination table (see FIG. 35E) is selected (step S827). Then, it is determined whether or not to end the special background based on whether or not the determination value set in the special background end determination table matches the background determination random number acquired in the command analysis process (step S91). (Step S828; determination of end of special background) Based on the coincidence, it is determined to end the special background with the change display. That is, it is determined that the background image is shifted from the special background to the normal background in the next variation display. In the special background end determination table shown in FIG. 35 (E), the number of determination values for ending the special background is 85 out of 256 special background determination random numbers from 0 to 255, and the ratio of ending the special background. Is set to about 1/3. In this embodiment, the background transition determination (step S815) as to whether or not to shift the normal background to the next seasonal background or special background, and the special background end determination as to whether or not to end the special background (step S828). ) And the same background determination random number, but different random numbers may be used.

  Next, the integrated CPU 212 determines that the variation display pattern is a winning pattern in step S824 (YES in step S824), the special background effect display reaches the upper limit number in step S825 (YES in step S825), or When it is determined in step S829 that the special background is to be ended by the special background end determination (YES in step S829), the special background execution flag is reset (step S830), and the display control of the seasonal background next to the normal background is performed. Is updated (set) to indicate a background flag (step S831). That is, when display control is performed by returning the background image from the special background to the normal background, display control is performed for the seasonal background next to the normal background that was displayed before the transition of the special background. On the other hand, when the variable display pattern is not a reach pattern in step S826 (NO in step S826), or when it is determined in step S829 that the special background is not ended by the special background end determination (NO in step S829), The special background execution flag setting state is continued and the process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, when display control of a special background is performed as the background image in the variable display, the special background effect display is the upper limit number of times (YES in step S825), or the variable display pattern is a reach pattern. (NO in step S826) and by determining that the special background is to be ended by the special background end determination (YES in step S829), the display of the normal background is controlled by the next variation display (however, the next time Except when the special background start condition is met in the variable display). That is, the special background end condition is when the special background effect display reaches the maximum number of times, or when the variable display pattern is a reach pattern and the special background end determination is made to end the special background. Is established. Note that the special background also ends when the variable display pattern is a hit pattern (YES in step S824). In this case, the normal background that was displayed before the transition to the special background is displayed in the next variable display. Without controlling the display of the next seasonal background, the spring background is forcibly displayed in the probability fluctuation state or short-time state after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the probability fluctuation state or small hit after the probabilistic short hit gaming state is controlled. In the normal state after the game state, the chance effect background is displayed and controlled.

  Here, the special background end condition is that the variation display pattern is a reach pattern, and the special background effect display is the upper limit number of times at a higher rate than the special background end determination is made to end the special background. It is established by Specifically, the average number of times that the special background effect display is continuously executed until the determination of ending the special background is made by the special background end determination is about 37 times when the variable display pattern is a reach pattern. On the other hand, the upper limit of the special background effect display is 25 times. As described above, in addition to setting the upper limit number of times for the special background effect display as the special background end condition, the determination is made that the variable display pattern is a reach pattern and the special background is ended by the special background end determination. By setting, it is possible to have a certain degree of randomness in the end timing of the special background while the basic background end condition is satisfied when the special background effect display reaches the maximum number of times. It can give a sharpening to the interest of

  In addition, the upper limit number of special background effect display and the variation display pattern is a reach pattern, and the special background effect display is continuously executed until the special background end determination is made to end the special background. In either case, the number of times is very small compared to the average number of times that the normal background effect display is continuously executed. In other words, the special background end condition is satisfied at a much higher rate than the special background start condition is satisfied. By configuring in this way, the number of times that the special background effect display is continuously executed is very small, and the expectation such as “Why is something happening?” Is particularly enhanced in the variable display where the special background effect display is performed. And can make the game more interesting.

  Also, in the background selection process (step S715), if the background forced flag is set in step S823 (YES in step S823), the upper limit number of special background effects display based on the reception of the operation signal from the remote controller 90 ( In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not (30 times) (step S832), and if the upper limit number has been reached (YES in step S832), display control of the seasonal background next to the normal background is indicated. The background flag is updated (set) (step S831). That is, when display control is performed by returning the background image from the special background to the normal background, display control is performed for the seasonal background next to the normal background that was displayed before the transition of the special background. On the other hand, when the special background effect display based on the reception of the operation signal from remote control 90 is not the upper limit number in step S832 (NO in step S832), the background forced flag set state is continued and the process is terminated. .

  Whether or not the special background effect display based on the reception of the operation signal from the remote controller 90 is the upper limit number is set in step S872 in the remote control signal reception end setting process (step S716) described later. The number of variable displays since then is counted by the number counter, and is determined by referring to the number counter. That is, the number of variable displays after the background forced flag is set in step S872 reaches the upper limit number (in this embodiment, 30 times) and is synchronized with the count counter becoming 0 (with the same variable display). ), It is determined that the special background effect display based on the reception of the operation signal from the remote controller 90 is the upper limit number of times.

  In this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the special background start condition is satisfied by the background shift determination in step S815, the background forced flag is set when an operation signal is received from the remote controller 90, and the background forced flag is set. Display control of special background is performed by the variable display after setting. By configuring in this way, the rate at which the special background start condition is satisfied is very low, and it is rare that a special background effect display is seen during a player's game period, but a specific player can play a game By requesting the venue manager to operate the ON / OFF operation button of the remote controller 90, the special background can be seen, and the play of the game can be enhanced.

  When an operation signal is received from the remote controller 90 during the special background effect display, the special background execution flag is reset in step S656 of the above-described remote control signal reception process (step S91a). Even if not established, the special background display control based on the special background execution flag (YES in step S817, step S833) is forcibly terminated. However, since the special background display control based on the background forced flag (YES in step S806, step S822) is continued, the special background effect display is continuously controlled.

  In the background selection process (step S715), if the chance effect execution flag is set in step S801 (YES in step S801), a display command corresponding to the chance effect execution flag is set (step S833). The display command set in step S833 is transmitted to the display control board 220 in the information output process (step S95), and based on the display command being received by the display CPU 221 mounted on the display control board 220, at least During a normal variation period from the start of the decorative symbol variation display to whether or not the reach mode is formed, the liquid crystal display 50 controls display of the chance effect background corresponding to the chance effect execution flag as a background image.

  Next, the integrated CPU 212 determines whether or not the variable display pattern is a winning pattern among the variable numbers 3 to 34 (step S834). If the variable display pattern is not a winning pattern (NO in step S834), a chance effect is produced. It is determined whether or not the chance effect background effect display according to the execution flag is the upper limit number (step S835). If the variable display pattern is a winning pattern in step S834 (YES in step S834) or if the chance effect background effect display has reached the upper limit number in step S835 (YES in step S835), the process proceeds to step S840. To do. Whether or not the chance effect background display according to the chance effect execution flag is the upper limit number is set in step S892, S898, and S899 of the chance effect setting process (step S717) described later. In some cases, the upper limit number is set in the number counter, and the number counter is decremented by 1 every time a display command corresponding to the chance effect execution flag is set in step S833. That is, when the number counter is 0, it is determined that the chance effect background effect display corresponding to the chance effect execution flag is the upper limit number of times. The upper limit of the chance effect background display is different depending on each chance effect execution flag, and the probability change short hit normal chance effect execution flag and the probability change short hit special chance effect execution flag are 35 times. On the other hand, the small chance normal chance effect execution flag is set to 30 times.

  If the effect display of the chance effect background according to the chance effect execution flag is not the upper limit number in step S835 (NO in step S835), it is further determined whether or not the effect display is the number of executions after the tenth start. (Step S836). It should be noted that whether or not the chance effect background effect display corresponding to the chance effect execution flag is the number of times of execution after the tenth time is a chance effect execution flag in steps S892, S898, and S899 of the chance effect setting process (step S717) described later. This is discriminated by referring to the number counter in which the upper limit number is set when is set.

  If the effect display of the chance effect background according to the chance effect execution flag in step S836 is the number of executions after the tenth time (YES in step S836), the chance effect end determination table (not shown) according to the chance effect execution flag. Is selected (step S836). The chance effect is determined based on whether or not the determination value set in the chance effect end determination table corresponding to the chance effect execution flag matches the chance effect determination random number acquired in the command analysis process (step S91). Is determined (step S837; end determination of chance effect), and it is determined that the chance effect is ended with the variable display based on the coincidence. That is, it is determined that the background image is shifted from the chance effect background to the normal background in the next variation display. It should be noted that in the chance effect end determination table according to the small hit normal chance effect execution flag, among the 60 chance effect determination random numbers from 0 to 59, the number of determination values for ending the chance effect at the small hit is six. Yes, the ratio of finishing the chance effect at the time of small hit is set to 1/10. On the other hand, in the chance effect end determination table according to the probability variation short hit normal chance effect execution flag and the probability variable short hit special chance effect execution flag, the chance at the probability variable short hit out of 60 chance effect determination random numbers from 0 to 59 The number of judgment values for ending the production is 4, and the ratio of ending the chance production at the probability variation short hit is set to 1/15 regardless of whether the normal chance production or the special chance production is executed. Yes.

  Next, when the variable display pattern is a winning pattern in step S834 (YES in step S834), the integrated CPU 212 determines that the chance effect background display according to the chance effect execution flag has reached the upper limit number in step S835 ( If it is determined in step S835 to be YES), or if it is determined in step S839 that the chance effect is to be ended (YES in step S839), the set chance effect execution flag is reset (step S840). ) If the background flag is not a flag indicating spring background display control (NO in step S841), the background flag is updated (set) to a flag indicating spring background display control (step S842). That is, when the display control is performed by returning the background image from the chance effect background to the normal background, the display of the spring background is controlled as the normal background. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S836 that the chance effect background effect display is less than 10 executions (NO in step S836) or in step S839 it is determined not to end the chance effect by the chance effect end determination (step S836). In NO at S839, the set state of the chance effect execution flag is continued and the process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, when the chance effect is being executed, and the chance effect background according to the chance effect execution flag is controlled as the background image in the variable display, the chance effect background effect display is the upper limit number of times ( YES in step S835), or the effect display of the chance effect background is the number of executions after the 10th time (YES in step S836), and the end of the chance effect is determined by the chance effect end determination. (YES in step S839) The display of the spring background is controlled as the normal background in the next variation display (except when the special background start condition is satisfied in the next variation display). That is, the end condition of the chance effect is that the chance effect background effect display reaches the upper limit number of times, or the chance effect background effect display is the number of executions after the tenth time, and the chance effect end determination is performed. It is established when it is determined that the process is terminated.

  Here, the end condition of the chance effect is a small hit rate at a higher rate than that established in the chance effect at the probability variable short hit based on the normal chance effect execution flag at the probability variable short hit or the special chance effect execution flag at the probability variable short hit. It is established by chance production at the time of a small hit based on the normal chance production execution flag. In other words, regardless of whether a normal chance effect or a special chance effect is being executed, the end condition of the chance effect is different depending on whether the chance effect is executed based on the probability variation short hit or small hit. There is a tendency for the number of executions of chance production to be greater at the time of the probability variation short hit than at the small hit. Specifically, when a chance effect at the time of short chance is executed, the end ratio by the chance effect end determination is 1/15 for each variable display, and the upper limit number of effect display is set to 35 times. On the other hand, when the chance effect at the time of a small hit is executed, the end ratio by the chance effect end determination is 1/10 for each variable display, and the upper limit number of effect display is set to 30 times. In this embodiment, by increasing the rate at which the end condition is satisfied in the chance effect at the small hit than at the chance at the short hit, the normal chance effect that makes it difficult to distinguish between the short hit or the small hit probability. Is executed, the expectation that the current gaming state is the probability fluctuation state can be enhanced as the display of the normal chance effect background is continued for a long period of time.

  In addition, when the chance effect at the probability variation short hit is executed, even if the chance effect end condition is established in the probability variation state after the probability variation short hit gaming state, Control the display of the normal background in a continuous state without ending. The chance effect is also ended when the variation display pattern is a hit pattern (YES in step S834), but the hit pattern is “normal reach at the probability variation short hit” with the variation number 33 or “small hit time at the variation number 34”. In the case of “normal reach”, the chance effect execution flag is set again in steps S892, S898, and S899 of the chance effect setting process (step S717) described later, and the spring background is displayed and controlled as the normal background in the next variable display. The chance effect background according to the chance effect execution flag is continuously displayed and controlled.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the remote control signal reception end setting process (step S716) executed in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S700). In the remote control signal reception end setting process, the integrated CPU 212 first determines whether the background forced flag is set (step S871). If the background forced flag is set (YES in step S871), the background forced flag It is determined whether or not the effect display (fluctuation display) after setting is the upper limit number (step S872). If the upper limit number corresponding to the background forced flag has been reached (YES in step S872), the background forced flag is reset (step S873), and a display command corresponding to the OFF operation of remote controller 90 is set (step S873). ).

  Whether or not the effect display after the background forced flag is set is the maximum number of times is determined by setting the maximum number of times to the number counter when the background forced flag is set in step S653 of the remote control signal processing (step S91a) described above. Each time a variable display pattern command is received from the main control board 201 and the variable display is started based on the fact that the variable display pattern reception flag is set in the decorative symbol variation start processing (step S700), 1 is subtracted. This is determined by referring to the number counter. That is, when the number counter becomes 0, it is determined that the effect display after the background forced flag is set based on the reception of the operation signal from the remote controller 90 is the upper limit number of times. Even if the effect display after the background forced flag is set is not the upper limit number of times, when the background forced flag is reset in step S657 of the remote control signal reception process (step S91a), the number counter is set. 0 (reset).

  Note that the liquid crystal display 50 may perform display control of not only the effect display indicating that the remote controller 90 has been turned ON, but also the remaining number of special background effect displays based on reception of operation signals from the remote controller 90. . That is, each time the variable display is started, the number of counters set based on the background forced flag is sequentially controlled by the liquid crystal display 50 so that the player can easily determine the remaining number of special background effect displays. Can be recognized. Further, the remote controller 90 may be provided with not only an ON / OFF operation button capable of switching the effect display of the liquid crystal display 50 but also a number setting button capable of setting the upper limit number of effect display of the special background. In this case, the manager (store clerk) of the game hall that manages the remote controller 90 operates the ON / OFF operation button, and the upper limit number of special background effect display is set by the number setting button, whereby the upper limit number is fixed. Instead, it can be set appropriately according to the situation (for example, according to the number of exchanged game balls).

  In this embodiment, after receiving an operation signal from the remote control 90 and setting the background forced flag in step S653 of the remote control signal reception process (step S91a), the remote control signal is received unless the operation signal is received again from the remote control 90. In step S873 of the end setting process (step S716), the special background is displayed as the background image by a predetermined number of times (30 times in this embodiment) until the maximum number of effects is reached and the background forced flag is reset. When the result of the control or the fluctuation display is a probable short hit or small hit, it is clarified which hit was made in the subsequent chance effect. However, even if the background forced flag is set, the spring background is displayed as a background image when the time reduction control is executed, and the chance effect background is displayed as a background image when the chance effect is executed. Therefore, the special background is not displayed in these cases. In this embodiment, even if the result of the variable display is a plurality of times, the probability variation short hit or the small hit, during the predetermined number of periods in which the background forced flag is set, the chance effect for the multiple hits It is clarified which hit it was at, but when the result of the fluctuation display is a probable short hit or small hit, the background forcing flag is reset and it is clarified which hit was in the chance effect The effective number of times may be up to one hit.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the chance effect setting process (step S717) executed in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S700). In the chance effect setting process, the integrated CPU 212 first determines whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S891), and if the small hit flag is set (YES in step S891), the small hit normal chance effect is determined. An execution flag is set (step S892). If the small hit flag is not set (NO in step S891), it is determined whether or not the probability variation short hit flag is set (step S893). If the small hit flag is not set in step S891 (NO in step S891), and if the probability variation short hit flag is not set in step S893 (NO in step S893), various chance effect execution flags are set. The process is terminated without doing so.

  If the probability variation short hit flag is set in step S893 (YES in step S893), it is determined whether the background forced flag is set (step S894). If the background forced flag is not set (in step S894). NO), a special chance effect execution determination table (not shown) is selected (step S895). Whether or not the special chance effect is executed based on whether or not the determination value set in the special chance effect execution determination table matches the chance effect determination random number acquired in the command analysis process (step S91). Is determined (step S896; special chance effect execution determination), and it is determined to start the special chance effect from the next variable display based on the coincidence. In the special chance effect execution determination table, the number of determination values for executing the special chance effect is six out of 60 chance effect determination random numbers from 0 to 59, and the special chance effect is executed when the probability change short hit. The ratio to be set is set to 1/10. In this embodiment, a special chance effect execution determination (step S896) as to whether or not a special chance effect is to be executed at the time of a probable shortfall, and a chance effect end determination (step S837) as to whether or not to end the chance effect. , The same chance effect determination random number is used, but different random numbers may be used.

  Next, the integrated CPU 212 determines that the background forced flag is set in step S894 (YES in step S894) or that the special chance effect is determined to be executed by the special chance effect execution determination in step S897 (step S897). At YES), a special chance effect execution flag is set (step S899). If it is determined in step S897 that the special chance effect execution is not to be executed (NO in step S897), the normal chance effect execution flag at the probability variation short hit is set (step S898).

  In this embodiment, when the fluctuation display pattern of “normal reach at the probability variation short hit” of the variation number 33 is executed at the probability variation short hit, the normal chance based on the normal chance presentation execution flag at the probability variation short strike from the next variation display. The display of the effect background is controlled, or the display of the special chance effect background based on the special chance effect execution flag at the probability variation short hit is controlled. In addition, when a variation display pattern of variation number 34 “normal reach at small hit” is executed at the time of small hit, execution of the normal chance at the small hit is performed without controlling display of the special chance effect background from the next variation display. The display of the normal chance background based on the flag is always performed. With this configuration, when the fluctuation display pattern of the fluctuation number 33 “normal reach at the probability variation short hit” or the fluctuation number 34 “normal reach at the small hit” is executed, either the probability fluctuation state or the normal state With the expectation that it is possible to determine whether the game state is the next game state, it is possible to focus on whether the background image of the normal chance effect background or the special chance effect background is controlled in the next variation display. When the display of the normal chance effect background is controlled, it cannot be determined whether the game state is the probability variation state or the normal state from the next variation display, but the expectation for the probability variation state is maintained. be able to. In addition, when the display of the special chance effect background is controlled, it can be known that the gaming state, which is difficult to discriminate in the variation display in which the “normal reach at the probability variation short hit” of the variation number 33 is executed, is the probability variation state. Thus, useful information for the player can be obtained.

  Here, at the time of the probability variation short hit, the determination to execute the normal chance effect is made at a higher rate than the determination to execute the special chance effect in the special chance effect execution determination. That is, the normal chance effect background is controlled to be displayed at a high rate even when the probability variation is short. By configuring in this way, the ratio of executing the special chance effect by the special chance effect execution determination is low, and the execution of the special chance effect background is rare even if the result of the variable display is a probable short hit, When the display of the special chance effect background is controlled, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

  Further, in this embodiment, the ratio of determining that a small hit gaming state is generated in the small hit determination (in this embodiment, the small hit probability is 1/70) is the big hit gaming state or the probability variation short in the big hit determination. It is much higher than the ratio (in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is 1/490) that is determined to generate a winning gaming state. That is, when the gaming state is the normal state, the small hit gaming state is frequently generated, but since the probability variation state is not controlled after the small hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state is generated. However, it is difficult to increase expectations for the gaming state after that. However, when the probability variation short hit gaming state is generated, the same chance effect is executed, and by determining whether the gaming state is the probability variation state or the normal state, the expectation for the probability variation state is increased, and the small hit amount is increased. The low expectation of the game state after the game state is suppressed. Furthermore, when the gaming state is a probability variation state, the ratio of determining that a big hit gaming state or a probable short winning gaming state is generated in the big hit determination is increased (in this embodiment, 1/70). The ratio that the gaming state when the chance effect is executed is the probability variation state is also increased, and the expectation for the probability variation state can be further increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the special chance effect execution determination is executed in step S896, the change after the background forced flag is set when the operation signal is received from the remote controller 90. When the result of the display is a probable short hit, display control of the special chance effect background is always performed. By configuring in this way, even if the ratio of executing the special chance effect is low due to the execution determination of the special chance effect, and the result of the variable display becomes the probability change short hit, either the probability fluctuation state or the normal state from the next fluctuation display It is difficult to determine whether the game state is the game state, but when the specific player requests the game hall manager to operate the ON / OFF operation button of the remote control 90, the game state is in the probability variation state. It can be determined that there is information that is inevitably obtained for the player.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 202 executes a hit determination process (step S404), and the integrated CPU 212 performs a chance effect setting process (in a variation display determined to generate a probability change short hit game state or a small hit game state) ( Step S717) is executed, and it is determined whether or not to execute the special chance effect from the next fluctuation display by the special chance effect execution determination, but the timing for determining the type of the chance effect is not limited to this, for example, After the end of the probable short hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined at the next variation display determined to generate the probable short hit game state or the small hit game state, that is, when the chance effect starts to be executed. Also good.

  Further, in this embodiment, the chance effect setting process (step S717) is executed with the variable display determined to generate the probability variation short hit gaming state, and whether or not the special chance effect is executed by the special chance effect execution determination. After the determination is made, the background selection process (step S715) is executed from the next fluctuation display, and the chance effect determined by the special chance effect execution determination (until the chance effect end determination is made by the chance effect end determination). Normal chance production or special chance production) is continuously executed. That is, if the special chance effect is not executed when the execution of the chance effect is started, the special chance effect is not executed even in the subsequent variable display. Here, the special chance effect execution determination may be executed, for example, for each variable display with a predetermined probability, or may be executed every predetermined number of times. With this configuration, even if the normal chance effect is executed when the execution of the chance effect is started, the special chance effect may be executed as long as the chance effect is continuously executed. It is possible to focus attention on the chance production not only when the execution of the production is started but also during the execution.

  Next, an example of an effect mode with a normal background as a background image controlled by the liquid crystal display 50 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect mode based on a background flag indicating display control of a spring background, and FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect mode based on a background flag indicating display control of a summer background. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect mode based on a background flag indicating display control of autumn background, and FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect mode based on a background flag indicating display control of a winter background. FIG.

  First, when the sub integrated substrate 211 receives a variable display pattern command corresponding to the variable display pattern, the display command corresponding to the background flag is set in the background selection process (step S715). Here, when the gaming state is the normal state, the background flag indicating the display control of one of the normal backgrounds is set unless the special background execution flag is set. When the background shift determination determines that the normal background shifts to the next seasonal background (YES in step S816, NO in step S817), or the normal background effect display according to the background flag is the upper limit number of times. (YES in step S807), the normal background transition condition is satisfied, and the background flag is updated to a flag indicating display control of the next seasonal background (step S818). When the special background is controlled to be displayed as the background image, the background flag is updated to a flag indicating the next seasonal background when the special background end condition is satisfied (step S831). Further, when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short time state after the big hit gaming state, the background flag is updated to a flag indicating display control of the spring background (step S804).

  In addition to the display command corresponding to the background flag, the display command corresponding to the variation display pattern, the stop symbol, and the notice pattern is also set in step S718 of the decorative symbol variation start process, and these display commands are output as information (step S95). ) To the display control board 220. The display CPU 221 mounted on the display control board 220 reads out process data from the display ROM 222 based on the received display command, sets a timer (indicating display image switching timing, etc.) based on the process data, and displays the liquid crystal. A drive signal is output to the display device 50 to control the display of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c and the background image.

  In this embodiment, even if the display commands corresponding to the change display pattern, the stop symbol, and the notice pattern are the same, when the display commands corresponding to the background flag are different, not only the background image but also the decorative symbols 50a to 50a. Process data for display control is also read by changing the display mode (operation mode) in the variable display of 50c. That is, the decorative symbols 50a to 50c are variably displayed in a display mode based on each background image.

  It should be noted that seven kinds of numerical symbols “1” to “seven” are used for the decorative symbols 50a to 50c. The decorative symbols 50a to 50c are four types of odd symbols (specific symbols) of “one”, “three”, “five” and “seven”, and three types of even numbers of “two”, “four” and “six”. It is composed of symbols (non-specific symbols) and is stored in the display ROM 222 of the display control board 220. In addition, among odd numbers, odd numbers are colored in red color and even numbers are colored in blue color so that the player can distinguish between specific symbols and non-specific symbols at first glance. It is composed. The decorative symbols 50a to 50c have a fan on the back of the numeric symbol (the front of the background image) and are opaque at the start of the variable display. In the process of shifting to, the display mode is changed to a semitransparent display so that the background image can be seen. Then, the decorative symbols 50a to 50c are changed to opaque display modes that are easily recognizable by the player again in the process of shifting to low-speed fluctuation before each of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is stopped and displayed based on the process data. The

  When the background flag is a flag indicating display control of the spring background 51f, as shown in FIGS. 38A to 38H, as a background image of the spring background 51f, a temple, cherry blossom, Mt. The refreshing scenery is drawn in a light blue color scheme. At this time, the variable display of each of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is controlled in a display mode in which a numeric symbol with a fan on the back is rotated in the left direction with the vertical center line of the numeric symbol as an axis. Specifically, from the state (FIG. 38 (A)) in which the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c (in the figure, “16. When the variable display of 50a to 50c is started, each of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c starts rotating in the left direction in synchronization with the fan (FIG. 38B). Then, the decorative symbols 50a to 50c are changed from the low-speed fluctuation to the high-speed fluctuation and are changed from the opaque to the translucent display mode (FIG. 38C). In addition, in the state where each of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is half-turned in the left direction, the numerical symbol becomes invisible to the player by becoming the back of the fan, and further, the state in which the symbols are half-turned to the left, that is, the decorative symbols 50a to 50c. Each time 50c makes one rotation, display control is performed by switching the numerical symbol.

  Next, when the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c starts to stop after a predetermined time has elapsed, first, the left decorative symbol 50a is changed from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and is again changed from a translucent to an opaque display mode ( FIG. 38 (D)). Then, along with the slow rotation of the left decorative design 50a, the numerical design is switched only by a number of designs (in the same drawing, two designs from “5” to “6”, “7”), and the left decorative design 50a is switched to a predetermined design. Stop display is performed with a stop symbol (“7” is illustrated in the figure) (FIGS. 38E and 38F). In addition, the stop operation of the right decorative design 50c is also started during the stop operation period of the left decorative design 50a, and the high-speed fluctuation is changed to the low-speed change during the stop operation period of the left decorative design 50a. Is changed to the display mode (FIG. 38F). Here, the variation display pattern of “normal variation” of variation number 1 transmitted from the main control board 201 is a variation display pattern without a reach mode, and the right decorative symbol 50 c is a stop symbol different from the left decorative symbol 50 a ( In FIG. 38, “1” is exemplified) and the display is stopped (FIG. 38G).

  Furthermore, during the period of the stop operation of the right decorative design 50c, the stop operation of the middle decorative design 50b is also started, the high-speed fluctuation is changed to the low-speed fluctuation, and the display mode is changed from translucent to opaque again. Is stopped and displayed (determined display) with a predetermined stop pattern (in the figure, “2” is illustrated) (FIGS. 38G and 38H). Since the combination of the stop-displayed decorative symbols 50a to 50c does not become a combination of the same symbols, the player is made to recognize that the result of the variable display is “out of place”.

  When the background flag is a flag indicating the display control of the summer background 51a, as shown in FIGS. 39A to 39H, as a background image of the summer background 51a, a group of high-rise buildings lined up in the night city is lighted. The lively scenery, such as up and launching a large fireworks in the vicinity, is depicted in a black color scheme. At this time, the variable display of each of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is performed by a vertical scroll that varies from the upper side to the lower side of the liquid crystal display 50, and each symbol is stopped and displayed by the stop operation peculiar to the summer background 51a. Display control is performed in a display mode. Specifically, from the state (FIG. 39 (A)) in which the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c (in FIG. 39A, “fivety-two” is illustrated) are stopped and displayed in the previous variation display. When the variable display of 50a to 50c is started, each of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is synchronized with the fan and starts vertical scrolling. Then, the decorative symbols 50a to 50c are changed from the low-speed fluctuation to the high-speed fluctuation, and are changed from the opaque to the semi-transparent display mode, and the fan on the back of the numerical symbol is not displayed (FIG. 38B).

  Next, when the variable display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c starts a stop operation after a predetermined time has elapsed, first, the left decorative symbol 50a that has been scrolled vertically is temporarily hidden. Then, in the direction opposite to the vertical scrolling direction, the fan folded upward from below the liquid crystal display 50 is launched as if it were fireworks, and the fan is gradually opened upward, The left decorative design 50a is made visible to the player by gradually enlarging and displaying the numerical design on the front of the fan in the left-right direction (FIGS. 39C to 39F). At this time, the left decorative symbol 50a is displayed (stopped display) with a predetermined stop symbol (in the figure, “seven” is exemplified). After that, the left decorative symbol 50a enlarged and displayed above the liquid crystal display 50 moves slowly downward while being reduced as a whole, and is stopped and displayed in the display mode before the start of the variable display ( FIG. 39 (G), (H)). As described above, in the stop operation of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c, the display mode is similar to the fireworks launch mode in association with the large fireworks drawn on the summer background 51a, and the decorative symbols 50a to 50c and the background image are displayed. The production is performed with a sense of unity.

  Furthermore, the stop operation of the right decorative design 50c is also started during the period of the stop operation of the left decorative design 50a, and the right decorative design 50c is different from the left decorative design 50a in a display manner resembling the firework launching manner ( In the same figure, “three” is exemplified) and stopped (FIGS. 39F and 39G). In addition, the stop operation of the middle decorative symbol 50b is also started during the period of the stop operation of the right decorative symbol 50c, and the middle decorative symbol 50b is displayed in a display manner resembling the firework launching manner. “5” is illustrated), and stop display (definite display) is performed (FIGS. 39G and 39H). Since the combination of the stop-displayed decorative symbols 50a to 50c does not become a combination of the same symbols, the player is made to recognize that the result of the variable display is “out of place”.

  In addition, when the background flag is a flag indicating display control of the autumn background 51g, as shown in FIGS. 40A to 40H, as a background image of the autumn background 51g, there is a temple or autumn leaves that image the fall of Japan. Vivid scenery such as trees is drawn in a red color scheme as a whole. At this time, the variable display of each of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is performed by rotating the numeric symbol with a fan on the back from the upper side to the lower side of the liquid crystal display 50 with the vertical center line of the numeric symbol as an axis. However, the display is controlled in a display mode in which each symbol is stopped and displayed by a unique stop operation of the autumn background 51g while swinging left and right. Specifically, from the state (FIG. 40 (A)) in which the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c (in the figure, “766” is illustrated) are stopped and displayed in the previous variation display. When the variable display of 50a to 50c is started, each of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c starts to rotate in either the left or right direction together with the fan, and the direction of the axis rotation on the screen of the liquid crystal display 50 (the same figure). In the middle, the left decorative design 50a changes in the right direction, and the middle decorative design 50b and the right decorative design 50c change in the left direction (FIG. 40B). Then, the decorative symbols 50a to 50c are changed from low-speed fluctuation to high-speed fluctuation, and are changed from opaque to translucent display mode (FIG. 40C). In addition, in the state where each of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is half-rotated in any of the left and right directions, the numerical symbol becomes invisible to the player by becoming the back of the fan, and further, the half-rotated state, that is, the decorative symbols 50a to 50c. Each time 50c makes one rotation, display control is performed by switching the numerical symbol. Further, in the process of variably displaying the decorative symbols 50a to 50c from the upper side to the lower side of the liquid crystal display 50, the direction of the shaft rotation is occasionally changed, so that it fluctuates in the horizontal direction as if autumn leaves are scattered. The display mode swings.

  Next, when the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c starts to stop after a predetermined time has elapsed, first, the left decorative symbol 50a is changed from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and is again changed from a translucent to an opaque display mode ( FIG. 40 (D)). Then, the left decorative design 50a moves from the upper right to the lower left of the liquid crystal display 50 while slowly reversing, and the numerical design is changed from several symbols (in the figure, from “three” to “four”). Only the symbol) is switched, and the left decorative symbol 50a is stopped and displayed with a predetermined stop symbol (in the figure, “four” is illustrated) (FIGS. 40E and 40F). As described above, in the stop operation of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c, the display pattern is made to be similar to the autumn leaves in association with the autumn leaves drawn on the autumn background 51g, and the decorative symbols 50a to 50c and the background image are displayed. The production with a sense of unity.

  Furthermore, the stop operation of the right decorative design 50c is also started during the period of the stop operation of the left decorative design 50a, and moves from the upper left to the lower right of the liquid crystal display 50 in a display mode resembling that autumn leaves are scattered, The right decorative design 50c is stopped and displayed with a stop design different from the left decorative design 50a (“5” is illustrated in the figure) (FIGS. 40E to 40G). In addition, the stop operation of the middle decorative symbol 50b is started during the period of the stop operation of the right decorative symbol 50c, and moves from the upper side of the liquid crystal display 50 toward the lower side in a display manner resembling that autumn leaves are scattered. The decoration symbol 50b is stopped and displayed (determined display) with a predetermined stop symbol (in the figure, “six” is illustrated) (FIGS. 40G and 40H). Since the combination of the stop-displayed decorative symbols 50a to 50c does not become a combination of the same symbols, the player is made to recognize that the result of the variable display is “out of place”.

  Further, when the background flag is a flag indicating the display control of the winter background 51h, as shown in FIGS. 41A to 41H, snow has accumulated as a background image of the winter background 51h to image the winter of Japan. The scenery of the cold sky, such as temples and Mt. Fuji, is drawn in blue color scheme as a whole. At this time, the variable display of each of the decorative symbols 50 a to 50 c is controlled in a vertical scroll display mode that varies from the upper side to the lower side of the liquid crystal display 50. Specifically, from the state (FIG. 41 (A)) in which the stop symbols (in FIG. 41A, “fivety-two” is illustrated) of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c are stopped and displayed in the previous variation display. When the variable display of 50a to 50c is started, each of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is synchronized with the fan and starts vertical scrolling. Then, the decorative symbols 50a to 50c are changed from the low speed fluctuation to the high speed fluctuation and are changed from the opaque to the translucent display mode (FIG. 41B).

  Next, when the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c starts to stop after a predetermined time has elapsed, first, the left decorative symbol 50a is changed from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and is again changed from a translucent to an opaque display mode ( FIG. 41 (C)). Then, the left decorative symbol 50a is slowly moved by several frames (two symbols from “5” to “six” and “seven” in the figure), and a predetermined stop symbol (“seven” in the figure). Is stopped) (FIGS. 41D and 41E). Moreover, the stop operation of the right decorative design 50c is also started during the period of the stop operation of the left decorative design 50a, the high-speed fluctuation is changed to the low-speed fluctuation, and the display mode is again changed from translucent to opaque (FIG. 41 (E ), (F)). Here, the variation display pattern of “normal variation” of variation number 1 transmitted from the main control board 201 is a variation display pattern without a reach mode, and the right decorative symbol 50 c is a stop symbol different from the left decorative symbol 50 a ( In the same figure, “4” is exemplified) and the display is stopped (FIG. 41G).

  Furthermore, the stop operation of the middle decorative symbol 50b is also started during the period of the stop operation of the right decorative symbol 50c, the high-speed fluctuation is changed to the low-speed fluctuation, and the display mode is changed from the translucent to the opaque again. Is stopped and displayed (determined display) with a predetermined stop symbol (in the figure, “6” is illustrated) (FIGS. 41G and 41H). Since the combination of the stop-displayed decorative symbols 50a to 50c does not become a combination of the same symbols, the player is made to recognize that the result of the variable display is “out of place”.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the display is controlled by switching the normal background in the order of the spring background 51f → summer background 51a → autumn background 51g → winter background 51h. By updating (setting) the background flag to a flag indicating the display control of the spring background 51f when the state is shifted from the normal state to the probability variation state or the short time state after the big hit gaming state, the background image is changed to normal after the big hit gaming state. Display control is fixed to a spring background 51f which is one of the backgrounds. Further, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state or the short time state after the big hit gaming state, the variation time from the start of the variation display of the decoration symbols 50a to 50c to the stop display of the decoration symbols 50a to 50c is shortened. Control (short-time control) is executed.

  When the received display command is a variation display pattern of variation number 2 “shortening variation”, the period of high-speed variation of each of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is shortened or the period of stop operation is shortened compared to “normal variation”. As a result, the process data in which the variation time of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is shortened is read out. Specifically, in the period of high-speed fluctuation of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c shown in FIG. 38C, the number of switching of the number symbols (number of rotations) is reduced and the rotational speed of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is increased. Can be shortened. Further, the period of the stop operation of the left decorative symbol 50a shown in FIGS. 38D to 38F is reduced by reducing the number of times (number of rotations) of the number symbol switching (for example, “five” to “six” in FIG. It can be shortened by increasing the rotation speed of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c while changing the symbol from two to "seven" but changing from "six" to "seven". The same applies to the symbol 50b and the right decorative symbol 50c). Furthermore, it can also shorten by reducing the space | interval which each of the decoration symbols 50a-50c starts a stop action. In the upper right part of the liquid crystal display 50, the characters “probably changing” in the probability variation state and the characters “time shorter” in the time-short state are controlled to be displayed.

  Here, when the background flag is a flag indicating the display control of the spring background 51f and the winter background 51h, compared to the case of the flag indicating the display control of the summer background 51a and the autumn background 51g, the "normal fluctuation" The period of the stop operation of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is originally set short. When the background flag is a flag indicating display control of the spring background 51f and the winter background 51h, the period of the stop operation of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c can be shortened, while the background flag is the summer background 51a. When the flag indicates the display control of the autumn background 51g, it is difficult to shorten the period of the stop operation of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c. When the background flag is a flag indicating the display control of the summer background 51a and the autumn background 51g, the stop operation of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is controlled to be displayed in a display mode peculiar to the background. If a part of the display mode or the display mode that resembles the appearance of autumn leaves is omitted or the display speed is increased, the effect itself by the variable display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is not established. On the other hand, when the background flag is a flag indicating display control of the spring background 51f and the winter background 51h, the stop operation of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is not controlled in the display mode specific to the background, and the period of the stop operation Can be shortened.

  For the reasons described above, when the game state is shifted to the probability variation state or the short time state, the display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is shortened in accordance with the display control of the spring background 51f and the winter background 51h as background images. Although variable display can be performed in a manner, display control of the spring background 51f is set in this embodiment. This is because the spring background 51f is the first (beginning) of the four seasons in the order of the spring background 51f → summer background 51a → autumn background 51g → winter background 51h. Alternatively, when the transition to the normal state is made after the completion of the time-saving state, the player starts from the spring background 51f so that the player can easily feel the change of the four seasons.

  Next, an example of “Tatsuto 10 effects” whose display is controlled by the liquid crystal display 50 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 43. FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect mode in which a “assume 10” effect is executed for a change display pattern with a slip change of change numbers 19 to 32. When the sub-integrated board 211 receives the variable display pattern command corresponding to the variable display pattern of the variable numbers 19 to 32, the display corresponding to the variable display pattern, the stop symbol, and the notice pattern is displayed in step S718 of the decorative symbol variation start process. Along with the command, a display command corresponding to the temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “ass and 10” effect is set when the execution of the “ass and 10” effect is determined in the “ass and 10” execution determination. These display commands are transmitted to the display control board 220 in the information output process (step S95). Here, in the step S862 of the “plus 10” setting process, the “plus 10” symbol table (in this embodiment, the “plus 10” at the non-probable big hit for the winning command indicating the non-probable big hit. In the symbol table, the symbol “Tatsuto 10” symbol number 26 “Tatsuto 10” symbol is determined from the common “Tasuto 10” symbol table) for the winning command indicating a loss. The display CPU 221 mounted on the display control board 220 reads out process data from the display ROM 222 based on the received display command, sets a timer (indicating display image switching timing, etc.) based on the process data, and displays the liquid crystal. A drive signal is output to the display device 50, and the variable display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is started (FIG. 42A).

  42A, after starting the variable display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c, the processing based on the process data is further executed, and the left decorative symbol 50a and the right decorative symbol 50c are temporarily stopped and displayed in order after a predetermined time has elapsed (FIG. 42A). 42 (B), (C)). At this time, the right decoration symbol 50c is produced with the “Tasuto 10” effect based on the variation display pattern accompanied by the slip variation, and the “Tasuto 10” symbol does not have the reach mode. The temporary stop symbol is displayed with a temporary stop symbol different from the symbol 50a (in the figure, “six” and “three” are illustrated). Since the left and right decorative symbols 50a and 50c displayed as temporarily stopped do not become the same symbol, it is possible to make the player think that “displacement” has been derived as a result of the variation display.

  42B and 42C, the left and right decorative symbols 50a and 50c are temporarily stopped and displayed in sequence, and further processing based on the process data is executed. After a predetermined time has elapsed, the middle decorative symbol 50b is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 42B). Among them, “1” is exemplified) and a temporary stop is displayed (FIG. 42D). From the recognition that the “delay” was derived as a result of the variable display by forming the “plus 10” symbol in which the sum of the numerical values of the temporarily displayed decorative symbols 50a to 50c is “10”. It can be recognized that at least a slip change is executed and a reach mode is derived, and the expectation for the big hit gaming state can be enhanced.

  In FIG. 42D, after “Tatsuto 10” symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, a process based on the process data is further executed, and a butterfly 51e appears from the lower center of the screen after a predetermined time has elapsed (FIG. 42E). )). Then, when the butterfly 51e jumps from the lower center of the screen to the center of the right side of the screen, it crosses the front of the right decorative design 50c, and as a sliding variation, the right decorative design 50c is rotated and displayed in the horizontal rotation direction. (FIGS. 42E and 42F). In the period in which the right decorative symbol 50c slips, the temporarily decorated intermediate decorative symbol 50b is gradually made transparent, and the middle decorative symbol 50b is erased until the right decorative symbol 50c stops.

  Further, processing based on the process data is executed, and the right decorative design 50c is stopped and displayed (FIG. 42 (G)). When the left and right decorative symbols 50a and 50c that are displayed in a stopped state are the same symbol (in the figure, “six” is illustrated), the reach mode is reached, and the player is notified of the start of reach production at the center of the screen. Display control of the “confirmation screen 51d” is performed (FIG. 42H).

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect mode in which the “plus 10” effect is executed with respect to the variable display pattern “plus 10 premium” with the variation number 18. When the sub-integrated substrate 211 receives a variation display pattern command corresponding to the variation display pattern of “Tasuto 10 Premium” with variation number 18, the variation display pattern, the stop symbol, and the advance notice in step S718 of the decorative symbol variation start process. Along with display commands corresponding to the patterns, display commands corresponding to the temporary stop symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “assault 10” effect are set, and these display commands are displayed on the display control board in the information output process (step S95). 220. Here, in the step S853 of the “plus 10” setting process, the “plus 10” symbol of the “plus 10” symbol number 11 is determined from the “plus 10” symbol table at the time of common use. The display CPU 221 mounted on the display control board 220 reads out process data from the display ROM 222 based on the received display command, sets a timer (indicating display image switching timing, etc.) based on the process data, and displays the liquid crystal. A drive signal is output to the display 50, and the variable display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is started.

  Then, after starting the variable display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c, a process based on the process data is further executed, and the left decorative symbol 50a and the right decorative symbol 50c are temporarily stopped and displayed in order after a predetermined time has elapsed (FIG. 43A). , (B)). At this time, the right decoration symbol 50c is executed with the “assass 10” effect based on the variation display pattern of “assass 10 premium” with the variation number 18, and the symbol “ass 10” is the reach mode. Therefore, the temporary stop symbol is displayed in a temporary stop symbol different from the left decorative symbol 50a (in the figure, “two” and “three” are illustrated). Since the left and right decorative symbols 50a and 50c displayed as temporarily stopped do not become the same symbol, it is possible to make the player think that “displacement” has been derived as a result of the variation display.

  43 (A) and 43 (B), the left and right decorative symbols 50a and 50c are temporarily stopped and displayed in sequence, and further processing based on the process data is executed. After a predetermined time has elapsed, the middle decorative symbol 50b is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 43). Among them, “5” is exemplified) and a temporary stop is displayed (FIG. 43C). From the recognition that the “delay” was derived as a result of the variable display by forming the “plus 10” symbol in which the sum of the numerical values of the temporarily displayed decorative symbols 50a to 50c is “10”. Turning around, it is possible to grasp which one of “Tasuto 10 Premium” with the variation number 18 and the slip variation with the variation numbers 19 to 32 is executed, and pay attention to the subsequent effect display. When the gaming state is a probability variation state, since the rate at which “number 10 premium” of the variation number 18 is executed is high, the expectation for the big hit gaming state can be particularly increased.

  Here, the integrated CPU 212 receives the variation display pattern command corresponding to the variation display pattern of variation number 18 “Tasuto 10 Premium” in the command analysis processing (step S91), and the information output processing (step S95). Then, a display command corresponding to the variable display pattern, the notice pattern, and the stop pattern is transmitted to the display control board 220, and at a predetermined timing after the start of the variable display, the lamp control board (step S94) performs the lamp driving board 156. A drive signal is output to the movable body drive unit motor 126 via the. Specifically, a driving pattern corresponding to the variation display pattern is selected from the integrated ROM 213 in the lamp control process (step S94), and a timer corresponding to the variation display pattern (driving time of the movable body driving unit motor 126, driving start). Time, etc.) is set, and a drive signal is output to the movable body drive unit motor 126 based on the selected drive pattern and timer. Thereby, the movable body drive unit motor 126 is driven and controlled in a predetermined drive pattern in synchronization with the display of the decorative symbols 50 a to 50 c on the liquid crystal display 50, and the movable body 124 appears in front of the liquid crystal display 50. Can be executed. The integrated ROM 213 stores a plurality of drive patterns in which the driving mode of the movable body drive unit motor 126 is described.

  The drive pattern stored in the integrated ROM 213 also describes the light emission mode of the LED mounted on the center lower LED board 116. That is, based on the drive pattern and timer selected in the lamp control process (step S94), a drive signal is output to the movable body drive unit motor 126 via the lamp drive board 156, and the LED light on the lower center LED board 116 is lit. Output a signal. Accordingly, the movable body driving unit motor 126 is driven and controlled in a predetermined driving pattern in synchronization with the variation display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c on the liquid crystal display 50, and the LED mounted on the center lower LED board 116 is controlled to a predetermined level. Light emission is controlled by the drive pattern, and when the movable body 124 appears in front of the liquid crystal display 50, an effect of irradiating the movable body 124 by light emission from the LED can be executed.

  In FIG. 43 (C), after “Tatsuto 10” symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, a driving signal based on the driving pattern is output to the movable body driving unit motor 126, and the movable body 124 is displayed on the liquid crystal display from the initial position to the driving position. Drive control is performed in front of the container 50 (FIGS. 43D and 43E). By driving the movable body 124 so that a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 50 (at least a part of the display area of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c) is covered, the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 50a to 50c are It becomes difficult or impossible for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbols 50a and 50c in the order of the decorative symbol 50b. Further, processing based on the process data is executed, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the screen of the liquid crystal display 50 is blacked out (darkened) to make the decorative symbols 50a to 50c and the background image invisible (FIG. 43 (F)). . As a result, after temporarily displaying the symbol “10”, the re-change display (switching of the designs) of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c becomes unpredictable, and in the re-change display, “What happens?” It is possible to increase the expectation of the above, and to effectively attract attention to the subsequent effect display.

  In this embodiment, after temporarily displaying the “plus 10” symbol, the movable body is covered so that a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 50 (at least a part of the display area of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c) is covered. 124 is driven, and the screen of the liquid crystal display 50 is blacked out (dark). However, it is only necessary to make the re-variable display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c difficult or invisible. For example, blackout (dark) The display is controlled by a concealing member that can be operated separately from the movable body 124, or can be controlled to display only a bright image or a background image as an image different from the image, or can be erased by turning off the power of the liquid crystal display 50. Part or all of the screen of the vessel 50 may be hidden.

  After blacking out the screen of the liquid crystal display 50 in FIG. 43 (F), processing based on the process data is further executed, and after a predetermined time has passed, the decorative symbols 50a to 50c and the background image are switched from the images before the blackout. The decorative symbols 50a to 50c are stopped and displayed (FIG. 43 (G)). At this time, since the part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 50 is still covered with the movable body 124, the symbols of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c switched from the “plus 10” symbol cannot be grasped.

  After switching the decorative symbols 50a to 50c and the background image in FIG. 43G, a drive signal based on the drive pattern is output to the movable body drive unit motor 126, and the movable body 124 is driven and controlled from the drive position to the initial position. (FIG. 43 (H)). By driving the movable body 124 and returning it to the initial position, the decorative symbols 50a to 50c that are stopped and displayed can be visually recognized by the player in the order of the right and left decorative symbols 50a and 50c. At this time, because the decorative symbols 50a to 50c that are stopped and displayed are a combination of the same odd number symbols (in the figure, “seven” is illustrated), as a result of the variation display, the probability variation big hit symbol has been derived. Can be recognized.

  In this embodiment, the movable body 124 is driven in front of the liquid crystal display 50 in synchronization with the decorative symbols 50 a to 50 c switched by the liquid crystal display 50 and the effect display of the background image. Thus, since the effect which linked | related the display content of the liquid crystal display 50 and the operation | movement aspect of the movable body 124 is performed, the effect of the effect display controlled by the liquid crystal display 50 can further be heightened. Further, in this embodiment, the probability variation jackpot is derived after temporarily displaying the “Tasuto 10” symbol based on the variation display pattern of “Tasuto 10 Premium” of the variation number 18. A variation display pattern for deriving a probable big hit may be set. As a result, when the symbol 10 is temporarily stopped and displayed, when the re-variable display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is made difficult to view or impossible to see, either the probability variation big hit or the non-probability big hit is derived. It is not possible to determine whether or not it is possible to pay particular attention to the subsequent effect display.

  Next, an example of a timing chart of an effect mode whose display is controlled by the liquid crystal display 50 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 45. FIG. 44A is a timing chart of a rendering mode based on a variation display pattern (variation display pattern of variation numbers 3 and 4) for executing a normal reach effect and a normal background, and FIG. 44B is a normal reach. It is a timing chart of the production mode based on the special background when the production is executed (variation display patterns of variation numbers 3 and 4). FIG. 45 (A) is a timing chart of an effect mode based on a variable display pattern (variable display pattern with variable numbers 5 to 16) for executing a super reach effect and a normal background. FIG. It is a timing chart of the production | generation aspect based on a special background when a super reach production (fluctuation display pattern of the fluctuation numbers 5-16) is performed.

  First, when the sub integrated substrate 211 receives a variable display pattern command corresponding to the variable display pattern, the display command corresponding to the background image is set in the background selection process (step S715). Here, as the background image, it is determined whether the special background start condition is satisfied during the duration of the normal background effect display (reset state of the special background execution flag), and the special background start condition is satisfied. If not (however, if the pattern is out of sync, the special background start condition is not always satisfied), a display command corresponding to the normal background (background flag) is set in step S819, while the effect display of the normal background is performed. During the continuation period (reset state of the special background execution flag), it is determined whether or not the special background start condition is satisfied, and if the special background start condition is satisfied, and the special background effect display is continued. If it is during the period (the special background execution flag is set), a display command corresponding to the special background is set in steps S821 and S822.

  Then, in addition to the display command corresponding to the background image of either the normal background or the special background, the display command corresponding to the variation display pattern, the stop symbol, and the notice pattern is also set in step S718 of the decorative symbol variation start process. The display command is transmitted to the display control board 220 in the information output process (step S95). The display CPU 221 mounted on the display control board 220 reads out process data from the display ROM 222 based on the received display command, sets a timer (indicating display image switching timing, etc.) based on the process data, and displays the liquid crystal. A drive signal is output to the display device 50 to control the display of the decorative symbol variation display and the background image.

  In this embodiment, even if the display commands corresponding to the variable display pattern, the stop symbol, and the notice pattern are the same, if the display command corresponding to the background image is different, not only the background image but also the decorative symbol variation Process data to be displayed and controlled by changing the display and the production mode is read out. In the variation display pattern, the variation time of the decorative pattern (the time from the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol until the stop display of all the decorative symbols), the variation display, the reach aspect such as reach production, etc. are set, When a display command corresponding to a normal background (background flag) is received, the display mode of the effect such as reach effect is controlled or the display of each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation time of the decorative symbol based on this variable display pattern. Process data is read out. On the other hand, when a display command corresponding to a special background is received, an effect mode (for example, a normal reach effect or a branch) that is different from the change display pattern, although it is the change time of the decorative design based on the change display pattern. Process data for performing display control of a special background effect different from these effects without executing the effect) or displaying the left and right decorative symbols at different stop display timings is read. However, when a display command corresponding to a variable display pattern without a reach effect is received, process data for display control by changing only the background image is read.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44A, the display CPU 221 receives a display command corresponding to the fluctuation display patterns of fluctuation numbers 3 and 4 for executing the normal reach effect and the normal background (background flag). In this case, the display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is started based on the variable display pattern, and the left and right decorative symbols 50a and 50c are sequentially stopped and displayed in the same symbol to form a reach mode. Display control of the “reach confirmation screen 51d” for notifying that it has been formed. Then, after the display control of the “reach determination screen 51d”, the normal reach effect is further executed based on the variation display pattern, and the middle decorative symbol 50b is stopped and displayed in the normal reach effect, so that all the decorative symbols 50a to 50c are displayed. Stop display (determined display). In this case, display control of any of the seasonal backgrounds is performed based on the normal background (background flag) during the period (normal fluctuation period) from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c until the reach mode is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 44B, when the display CPU 221 receives a display command corresponding to the change display pattern of change numbers 3 and 4 for executing the normal reach effect and the special background, the change display is performed. Based on the pattern, the decorative patterns 50a to 50c are started to be displayed in a variable manner, and the execution of the special background effect is started at the timing when the reach mode is formed with the above-described normal background. Are sequentially displayed in the same pattern to form the reach mode, and then the medium decorative symbol 50b is stopped and displayed to stop display (determine display) all the decorative symbols 50a to 50c. In this case, the display of the special background is controlled during the period from the start of change of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c to the stop display, and as long as the special background effect display is continued (the special background flag is set), Display control of the special background is continued.

  As described above, when the display CPU 221 receives a display command corresponding to the special background, the variation time of the decorative symbol is the same as that when the display command corresponding to the normal background (background flag) is received. The normal reach production based on the pattern is changed, and a special background production different from this production is executed. The special background effect is an effect that is performed using the special background that is displayed and controlled from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c, and an effect with a sense of unity is executed before and after the start of the special background effect. When a display command corresponding to the normal background (background flag) is received, the left and right decorative symbols 50a and 50c are stopped before the execution of the normal reach effect, whereas the display command corresponding to the special background is displayed. When the display CPU 221 receives it, the left and right decorative symbols 50a and 50c are stopped and displayed during execution (before the end) of the special background effect. That is, with the execution of the special background effect, the stop display timing of the left and right decorative symbols 50a and 50c based on the variable display pattern is delayed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 45A, when the display CPU 221 receives a display command corresponding to the change display pattern of change numbers 5 to 16 for executing the super reach effect and the normal background (background flag). Starts the variation display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c based on the variation display pattern, and forms the reach mode by stopping and displaying the left and right decorative symbols 50a and 50c in order with the same symbol, and the reach mode is formed. The “reach determination screen 51d” for notifying that is displayed is controlled. Then, after the display control of the “reach determination screen 51d”, the normal reach effect, the branch effect, and the super reach effect are sequentially executed based on the variable display pattern, and the medium decorative design 50b is stopped and displayed in the super reach effect. To stop and display (decision display) all the decorative symbols 50a to 50c. Also in this case, display control of any of the seasonal backgrounds is performed based on the normal background (background flag) during the period from the start of variation of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c until the reach mode is formed (normal variation period).

  As shown in FIG. 45 (B), when the display CPU 221 receives a display command corresponding to the change display pattern of change numbers 5 to 16 for executing the super reach effect and the special background, the change is displayed. Based on the display pattern, the display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is started, and the special background effect starts to be executed at the timing when the reach aspect is formed in the normal background. The right and left decorative symbols 50a, After the reach form is formed by sequentially stopping and displaying 50c with the same symbol, the super reach effect is further executed based on the variable display pattern, and the medium decorative symbol 50b is stopped and displayed in the super reach effect. The decorative symbols 50a to 50c are stopped and displayed (determined display). In this case, display control of the special background is performed during a period (normal fluctuation period) from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c until the reach mode is formed.

  As described above, when the display command corresponding to the change display pattern of change numbers 5 to 16 for executing the super reach effect and the special background is received, the normal reach effect and the special background effect based on the change pattern are changed. A special background effect different from these effects is executed. In this case, unlike the case where the display command corresponding to the variation display pattern of variation numbers 3 and 4 for executing the normal reach effect is received, not only the normal reach effect but also the branch effect is not executed, and the super background next to the special background effect. Reach production is executed.

  In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the special background effect is set in the variable display pattern determined in step S415 of the variable display pattern setting process (step S41) on the main control board 201 (that is, in other words) In the background selection process (step S718a) in the sub-integrated board 211 during the continuous period of the special background effect display (special background execution flag set state). It depends on whether or not there is. With such a configuration, although the ratio of executing the special background effect is small, there is no need to separately provide a variable display pattern for executing the special background effect in the ROM 203 of the main control board 201, and the control of the main control board 201 is performed. The burden is not increased.

  In the above description, the special background effect for the variation display pattern without the variation variation of the variation numbers 5 to 16 has been described. For example, the variation variation 18 to 32 set in the variation display pattern table is associated with the variation of the slide. Special background effects can also be executed for the variable display pattern. In this case, the variation time becomes longer for the period during which the sliding variation is performed as compared to the variation display pattern without the sliding variation, but the special background effect production period is also increased accordingly.

  Further, in this embodiment, based on the fact that the variable display pattern corresponding to the variable display pattern is received by the sub-integrated board 211, the display command corresponding to the variable display pattern, the stop pattern, and the notice pattern, and the background image Display commands corresponding to the two display commands are transmitted to the display control board 220, and the display control board 220 determines process data corresponding to the two display commands and reads them from the display ROM 222. The display command transmitted to the control board 220 may be one display command corresponding to the variable display pattern, the stop pattern, the notice pattern, and the background image, and process data corresponding to this one display command may be read from the display ROM 222.

  Next, an example of an effect mode accompanied by a normal background whose display is controlled by the liquid crystal display 50 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 47. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect mode based on a variation display pattern of “normal variation” of variation number 1 and a normal background. When the sub integrated board 211 receives a variation display pattern command corresponding to the variation display pattern of variation number 1 of “normal variation”, it is determined whether or not the start condition for the special background 51b is satisfied in the background selection process (step S715). If the start condition for the special background 51b is not satisfied, a display command corresponding to the normal background (background flag) is set in step S819 of the background selection process. Also, display commands corresponding to the variation display pattern, stop symbol, and notice pattern are set in step S718 of the decorative symbol variation start process, and these display commands are transmitted to the display control board 220 in the information output process (step S95). To do. The display CPU 221 mounted on the display control board 220 reads out process data from the display ROM 222 based on the received display command, sets a timer (indicating display image switching timing, etc.) based on the process data, and displays the liquid crystal. A drive signal is output to the display 50 to control display of the normal background (summer background 51a). Here, as a normal background (summer background 51a), a lively background image is drawn in which a group of high-rise buildings lined up in a night city is lit up and a large firework is launched in the vicinity.

  Then, the variable display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is started based on the process data (FIG. 46A). After starting the variable display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c, the process based on the process data is further executed, and the left decorative symbol 50a and the right decorative symbol 50c are sequentially stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed (FIGS. 46B and 46C). )). At this time, the right decorative symbol 50c is a variation display pattern in which the variation display pattern of “normal variation” of variation number 1 transmitted from the main control board 201 is not accompanied by a reach mode, and is a stop symbol different from the left decorative symbol 50a. (In the same figure, “seven” and “three” are shown as an example).

  46B and 46C, the left and right decorative symbols 50a and 50c are stopped and displayed in order, and then the process based on the process data is executed, and the middle decorative symbol 50b is stopped and displayed (determined display) after a predetermined time has elapsed. (FIG. 46 (D)). Since the combination of the stop-displayed decorative symbols 50a to 50c does not become a combination of the same symbols, the player is made to recognize that the result of the variable display is “out of place”.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect mode based on a variable display pattern with a reach mode and a normal background. Here, among the variable display patterns (variable display patterns of the variable numbers 3 to 17) accompanied by the reach mode, the variable display pattern (variable numbers 5 to 16 of the variable numbers 5 to 16) is executed as the super reach effect after the normal reach effect is executed. The case of a variable display pattern) is illustrated. When the sub-integrated board 211 receives the variable display pattern command corresponding to the variable display patterns of the variable numbers 5 to 16, it is determined whether or not the special background 51b start condition is satisfied in the background selection process (step S715). If the start condition for the background 51b is not satisfied (however, if the pattern is an outlier pattern, the start condition for the special background 51b is not necessarily satisfied), the background selection process is performed according to the normal background (background flag) in step S819. Set the display command. Also, display commands corresponding to the variation display pattern, stop symbol, and notice pattern are set in step S718 of the decorative symbol variation start process, and these display commands are transmitted to the display control board 220 in the information output process (step S95). To do. The display CPU 221 mounted on the display control board 220 reads out process data from the display ROM 222 based on the received display command, sets a timer (indicating display image switching timing, etc.) based on the process data, and displays the liquid crystal. A drive signal is output to the display 50 to control display of the normal background (summer background 51a).

  Then, the variable display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is started based on the process data (see FIG. 46A). After starting the variable display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c, processing based on the process data is further executed, and the left decorative symbol 50a and the right decorative symbol 50c are stopped and displayed in order after a predetermined time has elapsed (FIG. 47A). At this time, the right decorative symbol 50c is a variable display pattern in which the variable display patterns of the variable numbers 5 to 16 transmitted from the main control board 201 have a reach mode, and the same stop symbol as the left decorative symbol 50a (in the same figure). Then, “seven” is exemplified) and the display is stopped. When the left and right decorative symbols 50a and 50c that are stopped and displayed are the same symbol, the reach mode is reached, and display control of the “reach confirmation screen 51d” that notifies the player of the start of reach production at the center of the screen (FIG. 47 ( B)).

  After the display control of the “reach determination screen 51d” in FIG. 47 (B), the process based on the process data is further executed to start the normal reach effect (FIG. 47 (C)). In the normal reach production, as shown in FIG. 47C, the background image is changed from the normal background 51a to the background for the normal reach production, and display control is performed, and the left and right decorative symbols 50a and 50c that are already stopped are displayed in the screen. In contrast, the middle decorative pattern 50b that is still in the variable display mode is controlled to be greatly displayed on the central vertical line in the screen. In addition, the medium decoration symbol 50b during the variable display is a mode in which each symbol of the medium decoration symbol 50b is sufficiently slow to be visually recognized by the player as compared with the normal variation period until the reach aspect is formed (same figure). In the example, a variation mode that slowly progresses one symbol at a time in the order of “one” to “two”, “two” to “three”, “three” to “four”), and above the center vertical line in the screen The display is variably displayed downward from FIG. 47 (C) to FIG. 47 (E).

  47 (C) to (E), the display of the medium decorative design 50b is slowly controlled over several symbols with low-speed fluctuations, and then processing based on the process data is further performed. Display control is performed with an ultra-low speed fluctuation indicating whether or not the medium decoration symbol 50b is stopped and displayed (FIG. 47 (F)). At this time, the display of the black color background is controlled from the top to the bottom of the screen as if the curtain is lowered, and the normal reach effect shifts to the branch effect (FIG. 47 (G)). In the branch effect, as shown in FIG. 47 (G), it is suggested which super reach effect is executed after execution of the branch effect depending on which color the bird flapping in the background of the black system color shines. The display mode is controlled. Specifically, “Song Reach A”, “Song Reach B”, and “Song Reach C” based on the variation display patterns of variation numbers 5 to 16 correspond to blue, yellow, and red, respectively, in the background of the black system color. The player recognizes which “single reach” is to be performed before the super reach production is performed, depending on whether the bird flapping in the blue finally shines in blue, yellow, or red.

  After display control of the effect mode based on the branch effect in FIG. 47 (G), processing based on the process data is further executed, and a predetermined super reach effect is started. Of the variable display patterns (variable display patterns of the variable numbers 3 to 11) accompanied by the reach mode, the variable display pattern (variable displays of the variable numbers 3 and 4) that executes only the normal reach effect without executing the super reach effect. In the case of (pattern), when the display control is performed with the ultra-low speed fluctuation indicating whether or not the medium decorative design 50b shown in FIG. Without stopping the display control, the middle decorative symbol 50b is a stop symbol corresponding to the winning (in the same figure, for example, "seven" which is a combination of the same symbol if it is a winning pattern, Stop display (determined display) at any one of “1” to “6” that is not a combination of the above.

  Next, an example of an effect mode with a special background whose display is controlled by the liquid crystal display 50 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 49. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect mode based on a variation display pattern of “normal variation” of variation number 1 and a special background. When the variation display pattern command corresponding to the variation display pattern of “normal variation” of variation number 1 is received by the sub-integrated substrate 211, when the special background execution flag is set in the background selection process (step S715), or If it is determined whether the start condition for the special background 51b is satisfied and the start condition for the special background 51b is satisfied, a display command corresponding to the special background is set in steps S821 and S822 of the background selection process. Also, display commands corresponding to the variation display pattern, stop symbol, and notice pattern are set in step S718 of the decorative symbol variation start process, and these display commands are transmitted to the display control board 220 in the information output process (step S95). To do. The display CPU 221 mounted on the display control board 220 reads out process data from the display ROM 222 based on the received display command, sets a timer (indicating display image switching timing, etc.) based on the process data, and displays the liquid crystal. A drive signal is output to the display 50 to control display of a special background 51b different from the normal background.

  Then, the variable display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is started based on the process data (FIG. 48A). Unlike the lively background image rich in color that is displayed and controlled in the normal background, the special background 51b is displayed with a rectangular picture frame 51c together with a room drawn in sepia, so that the production is strictly performed. proceed. In addition, the frame 51c is a slow mode with the picture drawn inside (in the figure, the mode of moving from the left to the center and from the center to the right in the screen is illustrated), and from the left in the screen It is moving toward the right (FIG. 48B). In this embodiment, a portrait of a famous female singer is drawn as a picture drawn on the frame 51c. However, animals, landscapes, etc. may be drawn in addition to a person, or a photograph thereof.

  Further, processing based on the process data is executed, and the left decorative symbol 50a and the right decorative symbol 50c are sequentially stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed (FIGS. 48C and 48D). At this time, the right decorative symbol 50c is a variation display pattern in which the variation display pattern of “normal variation” of variation number 1 transmitted from the main control board 201 is not accompanied by a reach mode, and is a stop symbol different from the left decorative symbol 50a. (In the figure, “seven” and “four” are shown as an example).

  48 (C) and 48 (D), the left and right decorative symbols 50a and 50c are stopped and displayed in order, and then the process based on the process data is executed. (FIG. 48 (E)). Since the combination of the stop-displayed decorative symbols 50a to 50c does not become a combination of the same symbols, the player is made to recognize that the result of the variable display is “out of place”. At this time, the frame 51c that has moved from the left to the right in the screen is hidden by reaching the right end in the screen, but the next variable display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is started. Sometimes, the display of the frame 51c is controlled again at the right end in the screen (FIG. 48 (F)). That is, every time the decorative symbols 50a to 50c are variably displayed, the movement from the left to the right in the screen is repeatedly displayed and controlled. A plurality of types of portraits are stored in the display ROM 222 as the portrait drawn on the frame 51c, and the display is controlled by switching to the next portrait every time the decorative symbols 50a to 50c are variably displayed. When the last picture stored in the display ROM 222 is controlled, the display is controlled after returning to the first picture.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect mode based on a variable display pattern with a reach mode and a special background. Here, among the variable display patterns (variable display patterns of the variable numbers 3 to 17) accompanied by the reach mode, the variable display pattern (variable numbers 5 to 16 of the variable numbers 5 to 16) is executed as the super reach effect after the normal reach effect is executed. The case of a variable display pattern) is illustrated. When the sub integrated board 211 receives a variable display pattern command corresponding to the variable display patterns of the variable numbers 5 to 16, if the special background execution flag is set in the background selection process (step S715), or the special background 51b. When the start condition for the special background 51b is satisfied by determining whether or not the start condition is satisfied, a display command corresponding to the special background is set in steps S821 and S822 of the background selection process. Also, display commands corresponding to the variation display pattern, stop symbol, and notice pattern are set in step S718 of the decorative symbol variation start process, and these display commands are transmitted to the display control board 220 in the information output process (step S95). To do. The display CPU 221 mounted on the display control board 220 reads out process data from the display ROM 222 based on the received display command, sets a timer (indicating display image switching timing, etc.) based on the process data, and displays the liquid crystal. A drive signal is output to the display 50 to control display of a special background 51b different from the normal background.

  Then, the variable display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is started based on the process data (FIG. 49A). The painting is controlled to display a mode in which the special background 51b moves from the left to the right in the screen, but at a predetermined timing (the timing at which the left and right decorative symbols 50a and 50c are stopped and displayed on the normal background 51a). A stop background is displayed near the center of the inside, and a special background effect is started (FIG. 49B). In the special background effect, the picture 51c controlled to be displayed as a part of the special background 51b is stopped and displayed near the center of the screen, and the pictures drawn on the picture frame 51c are sequentially switched and displayed (FIG. 49). (B)-(E)). As described above, when the special background effect is not executed or before the start of the special background effect, the frame 51c moves from the left to the right in the screen. Since the display is stopped near the center of the picture, the picture drawn on the frame 51c can be fully appreciated, and the contents of the picture can be fully enjoyed. When the last picture stored in the display ROM 222 is controlled, the display is controlled after returning to the first picture.

  Further, processing based on the process data is executed, and the left decorative symbol 50a and the right decorative symbol 50c are stopped and displayed in order after a predetermined time has elapsed (FIGS. 49E and 49F). At this time, the right decorative symbol 50c is a variable display pattern in which the variable display patterns of the variable numbers 5 to 16 transmitted from the main control board 201 have a reach mode, and the same stop symbol as the left decorative symbol 50a (in the same figure). Then, “seven” is exemplified) and the display is stopped.

  49E and 49F, the left and right decorative symbols 50a and 50c are stopped and displayed in order, and further processing based on the process data is executed to display a picture together with the frame 51c stopped and displayed near the center of the screen. The display is gradually enlarged toward the front of the screen (FIG. 49G). Then, the background image is changed from the special background 51b to the background for the super reach effect, and the display control is performed, and a predetermined super reach effect is executed. Of the variable display patterns (variable display patterns of the variable numbers 3 to 11) accompanied by the reach mode, the variable display pattern (variable displays of the variable numbers 3 and 4) that executes only the normal reach effect without executing the super reach effect. In the case of the pattern), without stopping the picture with the frame 51c to be enlarged toward the front of the screen, the middle decorative symbol 50b is stopped according to the winning symbol (in FIG. In the case of “seven”, which is a combination of (1), or “1” to “6” which is not a combination of the same symbols if they are out-of-line patterns, the display is stopped (determined display).

  In this embodiment, when the display pattern is a variable display pattern (variable display pattern of variable numbers 3 to 16) that executes at least a normal reach effect, a normal reach effect (depending on whether the background image is a normal background or a special background) And a branching effect) or a special background effect are controlled. Here, when the display of the normal background based on the background flag is controlled, an effect accompanied by a lively background image (such as a normal reach effect) progresses, while when the display of the special background 51b is controlled, it is severe. Production with special background images (special background production etc.) proceeds. In this way, the special background 51b with a low execution rate is highlighted in the game by changing the taste of the effect according to the background image. In the variable display in which the special background 51b is effect-displayed, “What happens? ”Can be particularly enhanced, and it can make the game more interesting.

  In this embodiment, the sound output mode output from the upper speaker 29 and the lower speaker 14 is also changed in synchronization with the change of the background image. That is, when the display of the normal background based on the background flag is controlled, it is output in a lively sound output mode with a fast tempo, while when the special background 51b is controlled to be displayed, a calm sound output with a slow tempo is output. Output in the form. In this way, by changing the taste of the sound output mode output from the upper speaker 29 and the lower speaker 14 in accordance with the presentation mode controlled by the liquid crystal display 50, a special background with a low execution rate during the game 51b can be made more prominent, and a sense of expectation such as “What is happening?” Can be synergistically increased in the variable display in which the special background 51b is produced and displayed, which can further enhance the fun of the game. .

  Further, in this embodiment, when display control of the special background 51b is performed, at least when it is determined to be a variable display pattern (variable display pattern of variable numbers 3 to 16) for executing a normal reach effect, Normal reach production is not executed. Here, the fluctuation display pattern (fluctuation display pattern of fluctuation numbers 3 and 4) for executing only the normal reach effect is a fluctuation display pattern (variation display pattern of fluctuation numbers 5 to 16) for executing the super reach effect after the execution of the normal reach effect. The derivation ratio is higher than that in the above, but the variation display pattern that executes only the normal reach effect among the change display patterns that execute the reach effect is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation. In other words, the ratio of transition from the normal reach production to the super reach production through the branch production is low, and the ratio of “out of” in the normal reach production (stopped by the combination of outlier symbols) is high, and the normal reach production is frequently executed. In spite of that, it is a production that does not raise the expectation that will be a big hit for the player. In this embodiment, when the special background 51b is displayed and controlled, the normal reach effect is not executed, so that the player's bored feeling (bouncing) with respect to the normal reach effect that does not increase the expectation that is a big hit can be omitted. .

  Moreover, in the normal reach production, after the reach form is formed, each of the symbols in the interior decoration pattern 50b is displayed in a gradual manner so as to be sufficiently visible to the player, so that the player can be irritated. It is also assumed that there are players. However, when the display of the special background 51b is controlled, a special background effect is executed, and a reach form is formed after the execution of the special background effect (the stop display timing of the left and right decorative symbols 50a and 50c is delayed). Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the decorative display variation display in the special background effect during the effect period in which the normal reach effect should have been executed in the normal background without causing annoyance to the normal reach effect.

  In this embodiment, when the special background 51b is display-controlled, even if it is determined to be a variable display pattern (variable display pattern of variable numbers 5 to 16) for executing the super reach effect, A branching effect is not executed together with a normal reach effect. Here, the rate of transition to a super reach production with a high percentage of jackpots is low (for example, in the case of a loss, the variation display patterns of variation numbers 13 to 16 rather than the variation display pattern of “song reach A” of variation numbers 5 to 8 Since the rate of determination for the variable display pattern of “Song Reach C” is low), even in the branching effect, a super reach effect with a low percentage of big hits (for example, a variable display of “Song Reach A” with variable numbers 5-8) The ratio that suggests (pattern) is high. In this embodiment, when the display of the special background 51b is controlled, the branch effect is not executed together with the normal reach effect. Players can also be bored. In addition, after forming the reach aspect with the special background effect, the player can be surprised by suddenly executing the super reach effect. That is, the game does not become monotonous by giving unexpected effects to the effect display.

  Next, an example of entering a chance effect at the time of probability variation short hit or small hit controlled by the liquid crystal display 50 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect mode based on the variation display pattern of the variation number 33 “normal reach at the time of short variation” or the variation number 34 “normal reach at the small hit”. When the variation display pattern command corresponding to the variation display pattern of the variation number 33 “normal reach at the time of short variation” or the variation number 34 “normal reach at the small hit” of the variation number 34 is received by the sub-integrated board 211, In S718, a display command corresponding to the variable display pattern, the stop symbol, and the notice pattern is set, and in step S819 of the background selection process, a display command corresponding to the normal background (in the figure, a winter background) is set. These display commands are transmitted to the display control board 220 in the information output process (step S95). Here, as the decorative symbol stop symbol (probability short hit symbol or small hit symbol) in step S760 of the symbol setting process, the left and right decorative symbols in the left, middle and right decorative symbols are the same symbol. The combination of symbols that is a chance effect rush symbol that is different from the number symbol is determined. The display CPU 221 mounted on the display control board 220 reads out process data from the display ROM 222 based on the received display command, sets a timer (indicating display image switching timing, etc.) based on the process data, and displays the liquid crystal. A drive signal is output to the display 50 to control display of the normal background (winter background 51h).

  Then, the variable display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c is started based on the process data (FIG. 50A). After starting the variable display of the decorative symbols 50a to 50c, processing based on the process data is further executed, and the left decorative symbol 50a and the right decorative symbol 50c are sequentially stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. At this time, the right decorative symbol 50c is a variable display in which the fluctuation display pattern of the fluctuation number 33 “normal reach at the probability variation short” or the fluctuation number 34 “normal reach at the small hit” transmitted from the main control board 201 has a reach mode. It is a pattern and is stopped and displayed with the same stop symbol as the left decorative symbol 50a. When the left and right decorative symbols 50a and 50c that are stopped and displayed are the same symbol, the reach mode is reached, and display control of the “reach confirmation screen 51d” that informs the player of the start of reach production at the center of the screen (FIG. 50 ( B)).

  After the display control of the “reach determination screen 51d” in FIG. 50 (B), the process based on the process data is further executed to start the normal reach effect (FIG. 50 (C)). In the normal reach production, as shown in FIG. 50 (C), the background image is changed from the normal background (winter background 51h) to the normal reach production background, and the display control is performed, and the left and right decorative designs 50a and 50c are stopped ( In the same figure, "seven" is exemplified) is controlled to be displayed small in the lower left and right directions in the screen, while the medium decoration symbol 50b that is still being displayed is controlled to be greatly displayed on the central vertical line in the screen. In addition, the medium decoration symbol 50b during the variable display is a mode in which each symbol of the medium decoration symbol 50b is sufficiently slow to be visually recognized by the player as compared with the normal variation period until the reach aspect is formed. In the center vertical line, the display is changed from the upper side to the lower side.

  In FIG. 50C, the display of the medium decorative symbol 50b is slowly controlled over several symbols at a low speed, and further processing based on the process data is executed. After a predetermined time has passed, “TERESA” is displayed as the stop symbol of the intermediate decorative symbol 50b. The chance effect entry symbol drawn as “CHANCE” is stopped (determined) (FIG. 50D). Here, the chance production rush symbol is a symbol different from the seven types of symbols “1” to “7”, and the variation number 33 “normal reach short hit normal reach” or the variation number 34 “small hit hour” It is a symbol whose display is controlled only for variable display based on “normal reach”. Chance production rushing symbols are accompanied by a gorgeous fan that is different from the fans whose display is controlled on the back of the numerical symbol, and the display is suddenly controlled following the numerical symbol from above in the center vertical line on the screen, so that the player As a result of the change display, the derivation of “probable short hit” or “small hit” can be recognized.

  Next, when an effect command (short hit start command) related to the probable short hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state is received from the main control board 201, execution of the probable short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started, and the chance Display control of the effect entry display 51j is performed (FIG. 50E). Like the chance effect entry pattern, “TERESA CHANCE” is drawn on the chance effect entry display 51j, and the player is notified that the chance effect will be executed from the next variation display. In this way, in the case of executing the “variable probability short hit normal reach” of the variation number 33 and the case of executing the “small hit normal reach” of the variation number 34, the chance effect entry display is based on the short hit end command. By making the same effect display until the display control is finished, it is not possible to determine whether the hit is “probable short hit” or “small hit”, and after the probable short hit from the next fluctuation display It is not possible to grasp which game state is the normal state after the probability variation state or the small hit gaming state. Then, by controlling the display of the chance effect entry display, interest is increased from whether or not the gaming state becomes a probability variation state from the next variation display, and attention is paid to whether or not the special chance effect is executed. be able to.

  Here, during execution of the probable short hit game state or the small hit game state, the liquid crystal display 50 controls display of an effect display that notifies the start or execution of the probable short hit game state or the small hit game state. Instead, the chance effect entry display 51 is controlled based on the effect commands related to the effect display (short hit start command, short hit end command). Further, based on the production commands related to sound output (short hit opening / closing start command, short hit opening / closing end command), the lower speaker 14 outputs and controls the low-pitched sound output mode for notifying the reception of the production command. Note that the sound output output from the lower speaker 14 is set to a lower volume than other effect sounds and has a shorter output period, making it difficult for the player to notice. In this way, while making it difficult to notice the execution of the probability change short hit game state or the small hit game state, by making the chance effect entry display 51 controlled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 50 conscious of entering the chance effect, It is configured not to notice the open / close control of the conditional operation device.

  After the display control of the chance effect entry display 51j in FIG. 50E (after the probability variation short hit game state or the small hit game state ends), the execution of the chance effect is started, and the normal chance effect background 51k (FIG. 50 (F1)) or a special chance effect background 51m (FIG. 50 (F2)). Specifically, during execution of the chance effect, the display corresponding to the chance effect background is received when the variable display pattern command is received by the sub-integrated substrate 211 until the chance effect end determination is made by the chance effect end determination. A command is set and the liquid crystal display 50 controls the display of the chance effect background. A digital tic display mode is drawn on the chance effect background, and the impression is different from the natural display mode like the transition of the four seasons in the normal background.

  Here, “TERESATENG” is drawn on the normal chance effect background 51k arranged in the blue color, while “Rei” is drawn on the special chance effect background 51m arranged in the red color. In addition, the player is casually informed of whether or not the gaming state has been found to be a probability variation state due to the difference in background color and characters. When the display of the normal chance effect background 51k is controlled, it cannot be determined whether the gaming state is the probability variation state or the normal state from the next variation display, but the expectation for the probability variation state is maintained. Can be made. Further, when the display of the special chance effect background 51m is controlled, it can be known that the gaming state, which is difficult to discriminate in the variation display in which the variation number 33 “normal reach at probability variation short hit” is executed, is the probability variation state. This makes it possible to obtain useful information for the player.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine. However, even a gaming machine other than a pachinko machine, for example, a gaming machine formed by fusing a pachinko machine and a slot machine, etc. The invention can be applied.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the front frame and main body frame of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view which shows the back surface structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a back mounting unit. It is the perspective view which showed the detachability of the back surface mounting unit with respect to a game board. It is the longitudinal cross-sectional view which cut | disconnected the game board on the basis of the center of the width direction. It is a block diagram which shows the structure regarding control of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by CPU mounted in a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the power failure generation | occurrence | production performed by CPU mounted in a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by CPU mounted in a main board | substrate. It is a table | surface figure which shows the random number updated by CPU mounted in the main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the game process performed by CPU mounted in a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit determination process in a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the change display pattern setting process in a game process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation | variation display pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a hit-related control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hit game start process in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a hit game in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the integrated CPU mounted in a sub integration board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the 16ms timer interruption process performed by the integrated CPU mounted in a sub integration board | substrate. It is a table | surface figure which shows the random number updated by the integrated CPU mounted in a sub integration board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process in a 16 ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the remote control signal reception process in a 16 ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control process in a 16 ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration design change start process in an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the "assault 10" setting process in a decoration design change start process. FIG. 6A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a “plus 10” symbol table, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a “plus 10” symbol replacement table. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol setting process in a decoration symbol fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the background selection process in a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the background selection process in a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the background selection process in a decoration design change start process. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a spring background transition determination table, FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a summer background transition determination table, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a table, The figure (D) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a winter background transfer determination table, The figure (E) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a special background end determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the end setting process at the time of remote control signal reception in a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the chance production | presentation setting process in a decoration design change start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect in a normal background (spring background). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect in a normal background (summer background). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation in a normal background (autumn background). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect in a normal background (winter background). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of "assume 10" production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of "assume 10" production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the timing chart of a normal reach production and a special background production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the timing chart of a normal reach production and a special background production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation (normal background) without a reach aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a normal reach production (normal background). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production (special background) without a reach aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a special background effect (special background). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of derivation | leading-out of a chance effect.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 4 Game board 12 Game area 14 Lower speaker 18 Launch handle 29 Upper speaker 50 Liquid crystal display 50a-50c Decoration pattern 51a Normal background 51b Special background 51c Frame 51d Reach confirmation screen 66 Ball guidance decoration body 68 Upper start opening 70 Lower start opening 72 Large winning opening 90 Remote control 90a Receiver 120 Protection plate 124 Movable body 150 Liquid crystal display unit 156 Lamp drive board 201 Main control board 202 CPU
203 ROM
204 RAM
205 Dispensing board 211 Sub-integrated board 212 Integrated CPU
213 Integrated RAM
214 Integrated ROM
220 Display control board

Claims (1)

Fluctuation display means for variably displaying at least predetermined symbol information;
A profit granting state control means for controlling to a profit granting state for giving a profit to the player
A gaming machine that displays a predetermined specific display result by performing a variable display of the symbol information by the variable display means when controlling to a profit grant state in which a profit is granted to a player by the profit grant state control means In
First winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a predetermined profit to the player based on the establishment of the predetermined determination condition;
A high-probability state determination unit that determines whether or not the gaming state after the end of the profit-giving state is controlled to a high-probability state in which the ratio of determining that the first winning determination unit determines to give a profit to the player;
On the condition that the high-probability state determination unit determines to control to the high-probability state, the profit-granting state granted by the profit-granting state control unit is set as the first profit-granting state or the first profit Profit determination means for determining whether the second profit grant state is lower than the grant state,
When it is determined that no profit is given to the player by the first winning determination means, the second profit granting state is abbreviated at a higher rate than when it is determined that the first winning determination means gives a profit. A second winning determination means for determining whether or not to give equivalent profit;
A high-probability state control means for controlling the high-probability state after the profit-giving state ends when it is determined by the high-probability state determination means to control the high-probability state;
When it is determined that the high probability state determination means does not control the high probability state, or when the second winning determination means determines that a profit is to be given to the player, the high probability after the profit provision state ends. Normal state control means for controlling to a normal state different from the state;
Production mode storage means for storing a plurality of types of production modes;
Effect mode display control means for controlling display of the effect mode stored in the effect mode storage means on the variation display means,
The variation display means variably displays the symbol information based on the first winning determination means and the second winning determination means,
The effect mode storage means stores a game state effect mode that suggests a game state as the plurality of types of effect modes,
The effect mode display control means includes:
High probability state clear effect execution means for executing a high probability state clear effect by the high probability state effect mode in which the high probability state is clear among the gaming state effect modes;
High probability state unclear effect execution means for executing a high probability state unclear effect including any of the high probability state or the normal state in the game state effect mode,
Production determining means for determining either the high probability state unclear production or the high probability state clear production based on the gaming state after the end of the profit granting state ,
High probability of determining whether or not to end the high-probability state ambiguity effect in the variable display of the symbol information after the high-probability state ambiguity effect execution means starts executing the high-probability state ambiguity effect State unclear production end determination means ,
It determines that imparts a benefit to the player by the front Symbol first Toraku judging means and when it is determined that imparts the first benefit applied state by the profit determining means, until the end of the first benefit applied state While notifying the gaming state after the end of the first profit granting state ,
It determines that imparts a benefit to the player by the front Symbol first Toraku determination means, when and determines to grant the second profit applied state by the profit determining means, until the end of the second profit applied state In the change display of the symbol information after the end of the second profit granting state without notifying the gaming state after the end of the second profit granting state to the high probability state unclear effect and Determine and execute one of the high probability state clear effects ,
Without determining the gaming state after the end of the profit granting state by the end of the profit granting state when it is determined by the second winning determination means that the profit substantially equal to the second profit granting state is given. In the change display of the symbol information after the end of the profit granting state, the effect determining means determines and executes the high probability state unclear effect,
When the normal state control means controls the normal state, the high probability state unclear effect is terminated at a higher rate than when the high probability state control means is controlled to the high probability state. A game machine characterized in that a determination is made by a high probability state unclear effect end determination means .